S26KS128SDPBHA020 [INFINEON]

HYPERFLASH™;
S26KS128SDPBHA020
型号: S26KS128SDPBHA020
厂家: Infineon    Infineon
描述:

HYPERFLASH™

文件: 总125页 (文件大小:1686K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
S26KL512S, S26KS512S, S26KL256S, S26KS256S,  
S26KL128S, S26KS128S  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/  
128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Features  
• 3.0 V I/O, 11 bus signals  
- Single ended clock  
• 1.8 V I/O, 12 bus signals  
- Differential clock (CK, CK#)  
• Chip Select (CS#)  
• 8-bit data bus (DQ[7:0])  
• Read-write data strobe (RWDS)  
- HYPERFLASH™ memories use RWDS only as a Read Data Strobe  
• Up to 333 MBps sustained read throughput  
• DDR – two data transfers per clock  
• 166-MHz clock rate (333 MBps) at 1.8 V VCC  
• 100-MHz clock rate (200 MBps) at 3.0 V VCC  
• 96-ns initial random read access time  
- Initial random access read latency: 5 to 16 clock cycles  
• Sequential burst transactions  
• Configurable burst characteristics  
- Wrapped burst lengths:  
• 16 bytes (8 clocks)  
• 32 bytes (16 clocks)  
• 64 bytes (32 clocks)  
- Linear burst  
- Hybrid option: one wrapped burst followed by linear burst  
- Wrapped or linear burst type selected in each transaction  
- Configurable output drive strength  
• Low power modes  
- Active clock stop during read: 12 mA, no wake-up required  
- Standby: 25 µA (typical), no wake-up required  
- Deep Power-Down: 8 µA (typical)  
• 300 µs wake-up required  
• INT# output to generate external interrupt  
- Busy to Ready transition  
- ECC detection  
• RSTO# output to generate system level power-on reset  
- User configurable RSTO# LOW period  
• 512-byte program buffer  
Datasheet  
www.infineon.com  
Please read the Important Notice and Warnings at the end of this document  
page 1  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Features  
• Sector erase  
- Uniform 256-KB sectors  
- Optional eight 4-KB parameter sectors (32 KB total)  
• Advanced sector protection  
- Volatile and non-volatile protection methods for each sector  
• Separate 1024-byte one-time program array  
• Operating temperature  
- Industrial (–40°C to +85°C)  
- Industrial Plus (–40°C to +105°C)  
- Extended (–40°C to +125°C)  
- Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 3 (–40°C to +85°C)  
- Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 2 (–40°C to +105°C)  
- Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 1 (–40°C to +125°C)  
• ISO/TS16949 and AEC Q100 Certified  
• Endurance  
- 100,000 program/erase cycles  
• Retention  
- 20 year data retention  
• Erase and program current  
- Max peak < 100 mA  
• Packaging options  
- 24-ball FBGA  
• Additional features  
- ECC 1-bit correction, 2-bit detection  
- CRC  
Datasheet  
2
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Performance summary  
Performance summary  
Read access timings  
Maximum clock rate at 1.8 V VCC/VCC  
Maximum clock rate at 3.0 V VCC/VCC  
Q
Q
166 MHz  
100 MHz  
96 ns  
Maximum access time, (tACC  
)
Maximum CS# access time to first word @ 166 MHz  
118 ns  
Typical program / erase times  
Single word programming (2B = 16b)  
Write buffer programming (512B = 4096b)  
Sector erase time (256 KB = 2 Mb)  
500 µs (~4 KBps)  
475 µs (~1 MBps)  
930 ms (~282 KBps)  
Typical current consumption  
Burst read (Continuous read at 166 MHz)  
Power-on reset  
80 mA  
80 mA  
Sector erase current  
60 mA  
Write buffer programming current  
Standby (CS# = HIGH)  
60 mA  
25 µA  
30 µA (512 Mb)  
4 µA (all other densities)  
Deep power-down (CS# = HIGH, 85°C)  
Datasheet  
3
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Table of contents  
Table of contents  
Features ...........................................................................................................................................1  
Performance summary ......................................................................................................................3  
Table of contents...............................................................................................................................4  
1 General description.........................................................................................................................5  
1.1 DDR center aligned read strobe (DCARS) functionality ........................................................................................7  
1.2 Error detection and correction functionality ........................................................................................................7  
2 Connection diagram......................................................................................................................10  
2.1 FBGA 24-ball 5 × 5 array footprint ........................................................................................................................10  
3 Signal description.........................................................................................................................11  
4 HYPERBUS™ protocol ....................................................................................................................13  
4.1 Command / address bit assignments ..................................................................................................................14  
4.2 Read operations....................................................................................................................................................15  
4.3 HYPERFLASH™ Read with DCARS timing .............................................................................................................19  
4.4 Write operations ...................................................................................................................................................20  
5 Address space maps ......................................................................................................................22  
5.1 Flash memory array ..............................................................................................................................................23  
5.2 Device ID and CFI (ID-CFI) ASO .............................................................................................................................25  
6 Embedded operations ...................................................................................................................27  
6.1 Embedded algorithm controller (EAC).................................................................................................................27  
6.2 Program and erase summary...............................................................................................................................28  
6.3 Data protection.....................................................................................................................................................60  
7 Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map .................................................................71  
7.1 Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map — standard .............................................................71  
7.2 Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO Map — automotive grade / AEC-Q100 ...........................76  
8 Software interface reference .........................................................................................................77  
8.1 Command summary .............................................................................................................................................77  
9 Data integrity ...............................................................................................................................91  
9.1 Endurance .............................................................................................................................................................91  
9.2 Data retention .......................................................................................................................................................91  
10 Hardware interface .....................................................................................................................92  
11 Electrical specifications...............................................................................................................93  
11.1 Absolute maximum ratings ................................................................................................................................93  
11.2 Thermal resistance .............................................................................................................................................94  
11.3 Latchup characteristics ......................................................................................................................................94  
11.4 Operating ranges ................................................................................................................................................95  
11.5 DC characteristics (CMOS compatible) ..............................................................................................................96  
11.6 Power-up and power-down................................................................................................................................99  
11.7 Power-off with Hardware Data Protection ......................................................................................................104  
11.8 Power Conservation modes .............................................................................................................................104  
12 Timing specifications ................................................................................................................ 106  
12.1 AC test conditions .............................................................................................................................................106  
12.2 AC characteristics..............................................................................................................................................107  
13 Embedded algorithm performance ............................................................................................. 113  
14 Ordering information ................................................................................................................ 115  
14.1 Ordering part numbers.....................................................................................................................................115  
14.2 Valid combinations — standard .......................................................................................................................116  
14.3 Valid combinations — automotive grade / AEC-Q100.....................................................................................118  
15 Package diagram ...................................................................................................................... 120  
15.1 Fortified ball grid array 24-ball 6 × 8 × 1.0 mm (VAA024).................................................................................120  
Revision history ............................................................................................................................ 121  
Datasheet  
4
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
General description  
1
General description  
The HYPERFLASH™ family of products are high-speed CMOS, MIRRORBIT™NOR flash devices with the  
HYPERBUS™ low signal count DDR interface, that achieves high speed read throughput. The DDR protocol  
transfers two data bytes per clock cycle on the data (DQ) signals. A read or write access for the HYPERFLASH™  
consists of a series of 16-bit wide, one clock cycle data transfers at the internal HYPERFLASH™ core and two  
corresponding 8-bit wide, one-half-clock-cycle data transfers on the DQ signals.  
Both data and command/address information are transferred in DDR fashion over the 8-bit data bus. The clock  
input signals are used for signal capture by the HYPERFLASH™ device when receiving command/address/data  
information on the DQ signals. The read data strobe (RWDS) is an output from the HYPERFLASH™ device that  
indicates when data is being transferred from the memory to the host. RWDS is referenced to the rising and falling  
edges of CK during the data transfer portion of read operations.  
Command/address/write-data values are center aligned with the clock edges and read-data values are edge  
aligned with the transitions of RWDS.  
Read and write operations to the HYPERFLASH™ device are burst oriented. Read transactions can be specified to  
use either a wrapped or linear burst. During wrapped operation, accesses start at a selected location and  
continue for a configured number of locations in a group wrap sequence. During linear operation accesses start  
at a selected location and continue in a sequential manner until the read operation is terminated, when CS#  
returns HIGH. Write transactions transfer one or more 16-bit values.  
Mandatory Signals  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
C
O
M
M
A
CS#  
CK  
X
D
E
C
D
E
R
S
CK#  
DQ[7:0]  
X
MIRRORBIT  
N
D
ADDR  
MEMORY ARRAY  
RWDS  
Optional Signals  
D
E
C
O
D
E
R
RESET#  
RSTO#  
INT#  
SENSE AMPLIFIERS  
Y
Y DECODERS  
Data Latch  
PSC  
PSC#  
ADDR  
ADDRESS  
REGISTER  
RWDS  
GENERATOR  
Figure 1  
Logic block diagram  
The HYPERFLASH™ family consists of multiple densities, 1.8 V/3.0 V core and I/O, non-volatile, synchronous flash  
memory devices. These devices have an 8-bit (1-byte) wide DDR data bus and use only word-wide (16-bit data)  
address boundaries. Read operations provide 16 bits of data during each clock cycle (8 bits on each clock edge).  
Write operations take 16 bits of data from each clock cycle (8 bits on each clock edge).  
Datasheet  
5
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
General description  
Each random read accesses a 32-byte length and aligned set of data called a page. Each page consists of a pair  
of 16-byte aligned groups of array data called half-pages. Half-pages are aligned on 16-byte address boundaries.  
A read access requires two clock cycles to define the target half-page address and the burst type, then an  
additional initial latency. During the initial latency period the third clock cycle will specify the starting address  
within the target half-page. After the initial data value has been output, additional data can be read from the page  
on subsequent clock cycles in either a wrapped or linear manner. When configured in linear burst mode, while a  
page is being burst out, the device will automatically fetch the next sequential page from the MIRRORBIT™ flash  
memory array. This simultaneous burst output while fetching from the array allows for a linear sequential burst  
operation that can provide a sustained output of 333 MBps data rate [1-byte (8-bit data bus) * 2 (Data on both clock  
edges) * 166 MHz = 333 MBps].  
Table 1  
S26KS and S26KL address map  
Type  
Count  
Addresses  
A2–A0  
A7–A0  
A16–A3  
A16–A8  
Notes  
16 bytes  
512 bytes  
Word address within a half-page (16 byte)  
8 (word addresses)  
256 (word addresses)  
8192 (half-pages)  
512 (lines)  
Word address within write buffer line (512 byte)  
Half-pages (16 bytes) within erase sector (256 KB)  
Write buffer lines (512 bytes) within erase sector (256 KB)  
256 (512 Mb)  
128 (256 Mb)  
64 (128 Mb)  
Total number of erase sectors (256 KB)  
Amax–A17  
The device control logic is subdivided into two parallel operating sections: the host interface controller (HIC) and  
the embedded algorithm controller (EAC). The HIC monitors signal levels on the device inputs and drives outputs  
as needed to complete read and write data transfers with the host system (HYPERFLASH™ master). The HIC  
delivers data from the currently entered address map on read transfers; places write transfer address and data  
information into the EAC command memory; notifies the EAC of power transition, and write transfers. The EAC  
looks in the command memory, after a write transfer, for legal command sequences and performs the related  
Embedded Algorithms (EA).  
Changing the non-volatile data in the memory array requires a complex sequence of operations that are called  
EA’s. The algorithms are managed entirely by the internal EAC. The main algorithms perform programming and  
erase of the main flash array data. The host system writes command codes to the flash device address space. The  
EAC receives the command, performs all the necessary steps to complete the command, and provides status  
information during the progress of an EA.  
The erased state of each memory bit is a logic ‘1. Programming changes a logic ‘1’ (HIGH) to a logic ‘0’ (LOW).  
Only an erase operation is able to change a ‘0’ to a ‘1. An erase operation must be performed on an entire 256-KB  
(or 4-KB for parameter sectors) aligned group of data called a sector. When shipped from Infineon, all sectors are  
erased.  
Programming is done via a 512-byte write buffer. It is possible to write from one to 256 words, anywhere within  
the write buffer before starting a programming operation. Within the flash memory array, each 512-byte aligned  
group of data is called a line. A programming operation transfers data from the volatile write buffer to a  
non-volatile memory array line. The operation is called write buffer programming.  
The write buffer is filled with 1s after reset or the completion of any operation using the write buffer. Any locations  
not written to a ‘0’ by a Write to Buffer command are by default still filled with 1s. Any 1s in the write buffer do  
not affect data in the memory array during a programming operation.  
In addition to the mandatory signals (CS#, CK, CK#, DQ [7:0], RWDS) dedicated to the HYPERBUS™, the device also  
includes optional signals (RESET#, INT#, RSTO#, and phase shifted clocks PSC/PSC#).  
When RESET# transitions from LOW to HIGH the device returns to the default state that occurs after an internal  
power-on reset (POR).  
The INT# output can provide an interrupt to the HYPERFLASH™ master to indicate when the HYPERFLASH™  
transitions from busy to ready at the end of a program or erase operation.  
Datasheet  
6
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
General description  
The RSTO# is an open-drain output used to indicate when a POR is occurring within the device and can be used  
as a system level reset signal. Upon completion of the internal POR, the RSTO# signal will transition from LOW to  
HIGH impedance after a user defined timeout period has expired. Upon transition to the HIGH impedance state,  
the external pull-up resistance will pull RSTO# HIGH and the device immediately is placed into the Standby state.  
PSC/PSC# are differential phase shifted clock inputs used as a reference for RWDS edges instead of CK/CK#. Refer  
to “DDR center aligned read strobe (DCARS) functionality” on page 7 for more details.  
1.1  
DDR center aligned read strobe (DCARS) functionality  
The HYPERFLASH™ memories offer a configurable feature that enables independent skewing (phase shifting) of  
the RWDS signal with respect to the read data outputs.  
When the DCARS feature is enabled, a second differential phase shifted clock input PSC/PSC# is used as the  
reference for RWDS edges instead of CK/CK#. The second clock is generally a copy of CK/CK# that is phase shifted  
90° to place the RWDS edges centered within the DQ signals valid data window. However, other degrees of phase  
shift between CK/CK# and PSC/PSC# may be used to optimize the position of RWDS edges within the DQ signals  
valid data window so that RWDS provides the desired amount of data setup and hold time in relation to RWDS  
edges.  
PSC/PSC# is not used during a write transaction. PSC and PSC# may be driven LOW and HIGH respectively or,  
both may be driven LOW during write transactions.  
1.2  
Error detection and correction functionality  
Error correction code (ECC)  
1.2.1  
HYPERFLASH™ memories provide embedded hamming ECC generation during flash memory array  
programming, with error detection and correction during read.  
As each 16-byte aligned half-page of data, loaded into the write buffer, is transferred to the 512-byte flash  
memory array line, an ECC for each half-page ECC unit is also programmed in to a portion of the memory array  
not visible to the host system software.  
The ECC information is checked during each half-page flash array read operation. Any one bit error within the  
half-page will be corrected by the ECC logic during the access of each half-page.  
The ECC information for each half-page can be written once after each erase of the sector containing each  
half-page. Programming within the same half-page more than once will disable error detection and correction  
within that half-page.  
Word programming and write buffer programming, more than once within a half-page, is supported for legacy  
software compatibility. However, for the best data integrity, it is recommended to not use word programming or  
write buffer programming to program within a half-page, more than once. Multiple writes to the same half page  
without an erase will disable the ECC functionality since the ECC syndrome becomes invalid. For applications  
requiring multiple programming operations within the same half-page, it is recommended to add system  
software error detection and correction, to enhance the data integrity of half-pages that are programmed more  
than once.  
There is a mode that may be enabled for two bit error detection. When this mode is enabled, any one bit error in  
a half-page is corrected and any two bit error is detected and reported. In this mode, the ability to write to the  
same half-page more than once, after an erase, is disabled. In this mode, attempting to program more than once  
in the same half-page will result in programming operation failure status.  
ECC errors may be detected by reading an ECC status register, enabling an interrupt, or enabling the RWDS to  
stop when an uncorrectable error is encountered - to create a bus error before data is transferred to the  
HYPERBUS™ master.  
A register is provided to capture the address location of the ECC error.  
A counter is provided to count ECC corrections or uncorrectable errors.  
Datasheet  
7
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
General description  
1.2.2  
Cyclic redundancy check  
A group of commands are provided to perform a hardware accelerated CRC calculation over a user defined  
address range. The calculation is another type of embedded operation similar to programming or erase, in which  
the device is busy while the calculation is in progress. The CRC operation uses a 32-bit polynomial able to detect  
up to a 32-bit long group of error bits.  
A command is used to enter the CRC address space overlay (ASO) where the desired address range is loaded to  
start the CRC calculation. While entered in the CRC ASO the status of the CRC operation may be checked,  
suspended to read from the memory array, resumed, and the resulting check-value read. Refer to “Address  
space maps” on page 22 for more details.  
1.2.2.1  
CRC check-value calculation  
The check-value calculation command sequence causes the device to perform a CRC calculation over a user  
defined address range. The CRC calculation is achieved with the polynomial described in Figure 2.  
The check-value generation sequence is started by entering the CRC ASO. The next step is to load the beginning  
address into the CRC Start Address Register identifying the beginning of the address range that will be covered  
by the CRC calculation. Next, the ending address is loaded into the CRC End Address Register, this step starts the  
CRC calculation. The CRC process calculates the check-value on the data contained at the starting address  
through the ending address.  
During the calculation period, the device goes into the Busy state (SR[7] = 0). Once the check-value calculation  
has completed, the device returns to the Ready state (SR[7] = 1) and the calculated check-value is available in the  
check-value Low Result Register and the check-value High Result Register. The check-value Low Result Register  
contains check-value bits 0–15 and can be read from address 0 while the device is in the CRC ASO. The  
check-value High Result Register contains bits 16–31 and can be read from address 1 while the device is in the  
CRC ASO. The check-value Low Result Register and the check-value High Result Register are loaded with 0s once  
the CRC calculation process is initiated.  
The check-value calculation can only be initiated when the device is in Standby state and once started can be  
suspended with the CRC Suspend sequence to read data from the array. During the suspended state, the CRC  
Suspend Status Bit (CRCSSB) in the Status Register will be set (SR[8] = 1). Once suspended, the host can read the  
Status Register, read data from the array and can resume the CRC calculation by using the CRC Resume command  
sequence. Once initiated, the CRC ASO can be terminated with the ASO Exit Command or a Hardware Reset to  
return the device to read array mode. The check-value calculation cannot be performed while another ASO is  
active. A hardware reset will clear the value in the CRC Start Address Register, CRC End Address Register,  
check-value High Result Register, and the check-value Low Result Register.  
The Ending Address (EA) should be at least two addresses higher than the Starting Address (SA). If EA < SA + 2, the  
check-value calculation will abort and the device will return to the ready state (SR[7] = 1). SR[3] will be set (1) to  
indicate the aborted condition. If EA < SA + 2, the check-value High Result Register and the check-value Low  
Result Register will hold indeterminate data.  
CRC-32C Polynomial = X32 + X28 + X27 + X26 + X25 + X23 + X22 + X20 + X19 + X18 + X14 + X13 + X11 + X10 + X9 + X8 + X6 + 1  
Figure 2  
CRC-32 polynomial  
Datasheet  
8
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
General description  
Enter CRC ASO  
Load CRC Starting  
Address  
Load CRC Ending  
Address  
Read Status Register  
Busy ?  
SR[7]=0  
No  
Yes  
Read Checkvalue  
Result Register  
Exit CRC ASO  
Figure 3  
Check-value calculation sequence  
The read data ordering used in calculating the check-value from the CRC-32 polynomial is shown in Figure 4.  
32-Bit Read data  
Lower Order Word – Data from Address (n)  
Higher Order Word – Data from Address (n+1)  
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00  
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00  
CRC-32 Polynomial Data Ordering  
Figure 4  
Read data ordering  
Datasheet  
9
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Connection diagram  
2
Connection diagram  
2.1  
FBGA 24-ball 5 × 5 array footprint  
HYPERFLASH™ devices are provided in fortified ball grid array (FBGA), 1 mm pitch, 24-ball, 5 × 5 ball array  
footprint, with 6 mm × 8 mm body. The package height is device dependent and may be either 1 mm or 1.2 mm.  
Refer to “Ordering information” on page 115 for more details. Refer to the device datasheet ordering part  
number valid combinations section for the package in use.  
Figure 5  
24-ball FBGA, 6 × 8 mm, 5 × 5 ball footprint, top view[1, 2, 3]  
Notes  
1. B1 (CK#) is RFU on the 3.0 V device (model 02).  
2. B5 (PSC) and C5 (PSC#) are RFU on standard 3.0 V and 1.8 V devices (model 02). C5 (PSC#) is RFU on 3 V DCARS  
device (model 03).  
3. DNU — Do not Use. This pin/ball is connected internally and must be left unconnected.  
Datasheet  
10  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Signal description  
3
Signal description  
RESET#  
V
CC  
V
Q
CC  
CS#  
CK  
DQ[7:0]  
RWDS  
CK#  
PSC  
PSC#  
INT#  
RSTO#  
V
SS  
V
Q
SS  
Figure 6  
HYPERFLASH™ interface  
Datasheet  
11  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Signal description  
Table 2  
Symbol  
Signal description  
Type  
M / O  
Description  
Chip Select. HYPERFLASH™ bus transactions are initiated with a HIGH to LOW  
transition. HYPERFLASH™ bus transactions are terminated with a LOW to HIGH  
transition.  
CS#  
Input  
M
Differential Clock. Command / address / data information is input or output  
with respect to the crossing of the CK and CK# signals. CK# is only used on the  
1.8 V devices and may be left open or connected to CK on 3 V devices.  
CK, CK#  
Input  
M
Read Write Data Strobe. Output data during read transactions are edge aligned  
RWDS  
Output  
M
M
with RWDS.  
Input /  
Output  
Data Input / Output. Command / address / data information is transferred on  
these DQs during read and write transactions.  
DQ[7..0]  
Phase Shifted Clock. PSC/PSC# allows independent skewing of the RWDS  
signal with respect to the CK/CK# inputs. PSC# is only used on the 1.8 V device.  
PSC and PSC# may be driven HIGH and LOW respectively or both may be driven  
LOW during write transactions.  
INT Output. When LOW, the device is indicating that an internal event has  
occurred. This signal is intended to be used as a system level interrupt for the  
device to indicate that an on-chip event has occurred. INT# is an open-drain  
output.  
Hardware Reset. When LOW, the device will self initialize and return to the array  
read state. RWDS and DQ[7:0] are placed into the High-Z state when RESET# is  
LOW. RESET# includes a weak pull-up, if RESET# is left unconnected it will be  
pulled up to the HIGH state.  
PSC, PSC#  
INT#  
Input  
O
O
O
Output  
(open  
drain)  
RESET#  
Input  
RSTO# Output. RSTO# is an open-drain output used to indicate when a POR is  
occurring within the device and can be used as a system level reset signal. Upon  
completion of the internal POR the RSTO# signal will transition from LOW to  
HIGH impedance after a user defined timeout period has elapsed. Upon  
transition to the HIGH impedance state the external pull-up resistance will pull  
RSTO# HIGH and the device immediately is placed into the Standby state.  
Output  
(open  
drain)  
RSTO#  
VCC  
O
Power  
Supply  
P/G Power.  
Power  
VCC  
VSS  
VSS  
Q
P/G Input / Output Power.  
P/G Ground.  
Supply  
Power  
Supply  
Power  
Supply  
Q
P/G Input / Output Ground.  
Note  
4. M = Mandatory; O = Optional; P/G = Power / Ground.  
Datasheet  
12  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
4
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
All bus transactions can be classified as either read or write. A bus transaction is started with CS# going LOW with  
CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH. The transaction to be performed is presented to the HYPERFLASH™ device during the  
first three clock cycles in a DDR manner using all six clock edges. These first three clocks transfer three words of  
command / address (CA0, CA1, CA2) information to define the transaction characteristics:  
• Read or write transaction.  
• Whether the transaction will be to the memory array or to register space.  
- Although the HYPERBUS™ protocol provides for slave devices that have both memory and register address  
spaces, HYPERFLASH™ memories described in this specification do not differentiate between memory and  
registers as separate address spaces. There is a single address space selected by any transaction, independent  
of whether the transaction indicates the target location is in memory space or register space. Write  
transactions always place the transaction address and data into a a command register set (buffer). Read  
transactions return data from the memory array or from a register address space window that has been  
temporarily overlaid within the single address space by the execution of commands. The single address space  
with register space overlays methodology is backward compatible with legacy parallel NOR flash memory  
program and erase software drivers.  
• Whether a transaction will use a linear or wrapped burst sequence.  
- HYPERFLASH™ write transactions do not support burst sequence and ignore the burst type indication. Write  
command transactions transfer a single word per write. Only the word program command write data transfer  
may be done with a linear burst at up to 50 MHz.  
• The target half-page address (row and upper order column address).  
• The target word (within half-page) address (lower order column address).  
Once the transaction has been defined, a number of idle clock cycles are used to satisfy any read latency  
requirements before data is transferred. Once the target data has been transferred, the HYPERBUS™ master host  
completes the transaction by driving CS# HIGH with CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH. Data is transferred as 16-bit values  
with the first eight bits (15–8) transferred on a HIGH going CK (write data or CA bits) or RWDS edge (read data) and  
the second eight bits (7–0) being transferred on the LOW going CK or RWDS edge. Data transfers during read or  
write operations can be ended at any time by bringing CS# HIGH when CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH. Read data is  
edge aligned with RWDS transitions and Write data is center aligned with clock edges.  
Datasheet  
13  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
4.1  
Command / address bit assignments  
Table 3  
Command / Address bit assignments  
Bit name  
CA Bit#  
Bit function  
Identifies the transaction as a read or write.  
1 = Read operation  
47  
R/W#  
0 = Write operation  
Target space is defined in CA46.  
Indicates whether the read or write operation accesses the memory  
or register spaces.  
0 = Memory space  
1 = Register space  
46  
45  
Target  
The register space is intended to be used by volatile memory and  
peripheral devices. The HYPERFLASH™ devices will not take  
advantage of this feature and this bit should be set to ‘0’ during read  
or write transactions.  
Indicates whether the burst will be linear or wrapped.  
0 = Wrapped Burst  
1 = Linear Burst  
Burst type  
Reserved  
44–39 (1 Gb)  
44–38 (512 Mb)  
44–37 (128 Mb)  
Reserved for future address expansion.  
Reserved bits should be set to ‘0’ by the host controller.  
38–16 (1 Gb)  
37–16 (512 Mb)  
36–16 (128 Mb)  
Row and upper  
column address  
Half page component of target address.  
Reserved for future column address expansion.  
15–3  
2–0  
Reserved  
Reserved bits should be set to ‘0’ by the host controller.  
Lower column  
address  
Lower column component of the target address: System word  
address bits A2–0 selecting the starting word within a half-page.  
Datasheet  
14  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
4.2  
Read operations  
CA0 indicates that a read operation is to be performed and also indicates the burst type (wrapped or linear). Read  
operations begin the internal array access as soon as the half-page address has been presented in CA0 and CA1.  
CA2 identifies the target word address within the chosen half-page. The host then continues clocking for a  
number of cycles defined by the latency count setting in the Configuration Register. Once these latency clocks  
have been completed, the memory starts to simultaneously transition the read write data strobe (RWDS) and  
begins outputting the target data. New data is output in an edge aligned fashion upon every transition of RWDS.  
Data will continue to be output as long as the host continues to transition the clock (CK and CK#). Wrapped bursts  
will continue to wrap within the burst length and linear burst will output data in a sequential manner across page  
boundaries. A hybrid burst provides one initial wrapped burst followed by linear burst, as described in “Hybrid  
Burst” on page 68. Wrapped reads can be performed from the main array, the CFI tables in “Device ID and  
Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map” on page 71 and the secure silicon region (see “Hybrid Burst” on  
page 68). Read transfers can be ended at any time by bringing CS# HIGH when CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH.  
When a linear burst reaches the last address in the array, if the burst continues, the address counter will wrap  
around and roll back to address 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely. The entire  
memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction.  
The 16-byte and 32-byte wrapped bursts do not cross page boundaries and do not incur inter-page boundary  
crossing latencies. For a 64-byte wrapped burst read, a latency may occur during the target address to next page  
boundary crossing, depending on the starting address (see Table 22).  
CS#  
Initial Access  
CK# , CK  
5 cycle latency  
RWDS  
Dn  
A
Dn  
B
Dn+1 Dn+1  
DQ[7:0]  
47:40 39:32 31:24 23:16 15:8  
7:0  
A
B
Command-Address  
RWDS and Data  
are edge aligned  
Memory drives DQ[7:0]  
and RWDS  
Host drives DQ[7:0] and Memory drives RWDS  
Figure 7  
Read operation[5, 6, 7, 8]  
Notes  
5. Transactions must be initiated with CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH. CS# must return HIGH before a new transaction  
is initiated.  
6. Read access from the flash array starts once CA[23:16] is captured.  
7. The read latency is defined by the read latency value in the Volatile Configuration Register (or the Non-volatile  
Configuration Register).  
8. In this example of a read operation, the latency count was set to five clocks.  
Datasheet  
15  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
Table 4  
Maximum operating frequency for latency code options  
Latency code  
Latency clocks  
Maximum operating frequency (MHz)  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
5
6
7
8
52  
62  
72  
83  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
93  
104  
114  
125  
135  
145  
156  
166  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
12Clock  
9 Words Data  
Initial Latency  
CS#  
CK  
3 Clock Initial Page  
Crossing Latency  
RWDS  
A0 02 46 8A 80 07  
dd dd dd dd  
dd dd dd dd dd dd  
dd  
dd dd dd dd  
DQ[7-0  
]
Read from  
Address =123457h  
Address Address  
123457 123458  
Address Address Address  
12345D 12345E 12345F  
Address  
123460  
Address  
123461  
Figure 8  
Read transaction crossing a page boundary[12, 13, 14, 15, 16]  
Notes  
9. Default NVCR latency setting when the device is shipped from the factory is 16 clocks.  
10.The latency code is the value loaded into (Non) Volatile Configuration Register bits xVCR[7:4].  
11.Maximum operating frequency assumed to be using a device with tACC = 96 ns.  
12.Read operation starting at device address 123457h.  
13.Latency code loaded into the Configuration Register is 0111b which results in 12 latency clocks.  
14.Page boundary crossing requires three clocks in this case. 12 clock initial latency minus 9 clocks (words) of  
initial data.  
15.CK# is not shown but is the complement of the CK signal.  
16.CA45 = 1 for a linear read burst.  
Datasheet  
16  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
Table 5  
First page boundary crossing during linear read (Latency count = 11 clocks)  
Clock cycle  
Target  
address  
0
1
2
3
...  
12  
13  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
14  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
15  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
16  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
17  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
18  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
19  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
20  
D7  
D8  
D9  
21  
D8  
D9  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
0
1
D9  
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17  
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18  
2
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19  
3
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20  
4
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21  
5
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22  
6
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
X
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22  
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22  
7
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
Bus turnaround +  
initial latency  
8
CA0 CA1 CA2  
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25  
9
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27  
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28  
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29  
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30  
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
X
X
D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30  
D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30  
X
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33  
1
2
...  
11  
Latency Count  
Table 6  
First page boundary crossing during linear read (Latency count = 16 clocks)  
Clock cycle after CS# goes LOW  
Target  
address  
0
1
2
3
...  
17  
18  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
19  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
20  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
21  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
22  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
23  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
24  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
25  
D7  
D8  
D9  
26  
D8  
D9  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
0
1
D9  
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17  
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
D16 D17  
D16 D17  
D16 D17  
D16 D17  
D16 D17  
D16 D17  
D16 D17  
2
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
X
X
X
X
4
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
X
X
X
5
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
X
X
6
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
X
7
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
X
Bus turnaround +  
initial latency  
8
CA0 CA1 CA2  
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25  
9
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
D24 D25  
D24 D25  
D24 D25  
D24 D25  
D24 D25  
D24 D25  
D24 D25  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
X
X
X
X
X
X
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
X
X
X
X
X
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
X
X
X
X
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
X
X
X
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
X
X
X
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33  
1
2
...  
16  
Latency count  
Datasheet  
17  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
To calculate latency when crossing a page boundary, use the following formula:  
if ((PS - LTCY) < ADDR & (SP -1))  
{
((ADDR & (SP -1)) - PS + LTCY)  
}
else  
{0}  
where:  
PS = page size = 16 words  
SP = sub-page size = 8 words  
LTCY = late nc y  
ADDR = target address  
Datasheet  
18  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
4.3  
HYPERFLASH™ Read with DCARS timing  
The illustrations and parameters in this section are only those needed to define the DCARS feature and show the  
relationship between the phase shifted clock, RWDS, and data.  
tCSHI  
CS#  
tCSH  
tCSS  
tCSS  
tACC = Access time  
4 cycle latency  
CK, CK#  
PSC, PSC#  
RWDS  
tDSV  
tPSCRWDS  
tDSZ  
tIS  
tIH  
tDQLZ  
tCKD  
tOZ  
Dn  
A
Dn  
B
Dn+1  
A
Dn+1  
B
47:40 39:32 31:24 23:16 15:8  
7:0  
DQ[7:0]  
RWDS aligned  
by PSC  
Command-Address  
Memory drives DQ[7:0]  
and RWDS  
Host drives DQ[7:0] and Memory drives RWDS  
Figure 9  
HYPERFLASH™ Read DCARS timing diagram[17, 18, 19, 20]  
Notes  
17.Transactions must be initiated with CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH. CS# must return HIGH before a new  
transaction is initiated.  
18.CK# and PSC# are optional and shown as dashed line waveforms.  
19.The memory drives RWDS during read transactions.  
20.This example demonstrates a latency code setting of four clocks and no additional initial latency required.  
Datasheet  
19  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
4.4  
Write operations  
A write operation starts with the first three clock cycles providing the CAx (command / address) information  
indicating the transaction characteristics. The burst type bit CA[45) is ‘don’t care’ because the HYPERFLASH™  
device only supports a single write transaction of 16b or a continuous linear write burst that is only supported  
when loading data during a Word Program command. Immediately following the CA information the host is able  
to transfer the write data on the DQ bus. The first byte (A) of data is presented on the rising edge of CK and the  
second byte (B) is presented on the falling edge of CK. Write data is center aligned with the CK/CK# inputs. Write  
transfers can be ended at any time by bringing CS# HIGH when CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH.  
CS#  
CK# / CK  
RWDS  
47:40  
39:32  
31:24  
23:16  
15:8  
7:0  
DN A  
DN B  
DQ[7:0]  
Command-Address  
Host drives DQ[7:0] with Command-Address and Write Data  
Write_Data  
Figure 10  
Write operation[21, 22, 23]  
Write  
Write  
CS#  
CK  
Address=555h, Data=00AAh  
Address=2AAh, Data=0055h  
00 00 00 AA 00 05 00 AA  
00 00 00 55 00 02 00 55  
DQ[7-0]  
Write  
Write  
CS#  
CK  
Address=555h, Data=0080h  
Address=555h, Data=00AAh  
00 00 00 AA 00 05 00 80  
00 00 00 AA 00 05 00 AA  
DQ[7-0]  
Write  
Write  
CS#  
CK  
Address=2AAh, Data=0055h  
Address=sector, Data=0030h  
00 00 00 55 00 02 00 55  
00 0E 00 00 00 00 00 30  
DQ[7-0]  
Figure 11  
Notes  
Write transaction usage example: Erase operation command sequence[24, 25, 26, 27]  
21.Transactions must be initiated with CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH. CS# must return HIGH before a new  
transaction is initiated.  
22.RWDS will be driven LOW as long as CS# is LOW.  
23.Write operations are limited to a transaction of a single word (16b) or a linear write burst supported only  
when loading data during a Word Program command.This example demonstrates a latency code setting of  
four clocks and no additional initial latency required.  
24.See Figure 17 for the Erase Operation command sequence flowchart.  
25.Erase operation to the sector starting at 0700000h.  
26.CK# is not shown but is the complement of the CK signal.  
27.RWDS is not shown and is not used during Write transactions.  
Datasheet  
20  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
HYPERBUS™ protocol  
Write  
Write  
CS#  
CK  
Address=555h, Data=00AAh  
Address=2AAh, Data=0055h  
00 00 00 AA 00 05 00 AA  
00 00 00 55 00 02 00 55  
DQ [7-0]  
Write  
Write  
SA, Buffer Program Command  
Address=4xxxxh, Data=0025h  
SA, Word Count  
Address=4xxxxh, Data=0001h  
CS#  
CK  
00 00 8x xx 00 0x 00 25  
00 00 8x xx 00 0x 00 01  
DQ [7-0]  
Write  
Write  
Target Address + 0, Data 0  
Address=45678h, Data=2345h  
Target Address + 1, Data 1  
Address=45679h, Data=9876h  
CS#  
CK  
00 00 8A CF 00 00 23 45  
00 00 8A CF 00 01 98 76  
DQ [7-0]  
Write  
SA, Buffer Program Confirm  
Address=4xxxxh, Data=0029h  
CS#  
CK  
00 00 8x xx 00 0x 00 29  
DQ [7-0]  
Figure 12  
Write transaction usage example: Write Buffer Program command sequence[28, 29, 30, 31]  
Write  
Read  
Address=555h, Data=0070h  
Address=000h, SR Data=hh80h  
CS#  
CK  
5 Clock Latency  
RWDS  
DQ[7-0]  
00 00 00 AA 00 05 00 70  
80 00 00 00 00 00  
hh  
SR  
Figure 13  
Status Read transaction example[30]  
Notes  
28.See Figure 15 for the Write Buffer Program Operation command sequence flowchart.  
29.Program 2345h into address 45678h, and 9876h into address 45679h.  
30.CK# is not shown but is the complement of the CK signal.  
31.RWDS is not shown and is not used during Write transactions.  
Datasheet  
21  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Address space maps  
5
Address space maps  
Although the HYPERBUS™ protocol provides for slave devices that have both memory and register address  
spaces, HYPERFLASH™ memories described in this specification do not differentiate between memory and  
registers as separate address spaces. There is a single address space selected by any transaction, independent  
of whether the HYPERBUS™ transaction indicates the target location is in memory space or register space of the  
selected device.  
Write transactions always place the transaction address and data into a a command register set (buffer).  
Read transactions return data from the memory array or from a register address space window that has been  
temporarily overlaid within the single address space by the execution of commands. The single address range  
with register space overlays methodology is backward compatible with legacy parallel NOR flash memory  
program and erase software drivers.  
There are several separate address spaces that may appear within the address range of the flash memory device.  
One address space is visible (entered) at any given time.  
• Flash memory array: The main non-volatile memory array used for storage of data that may be randomly  
accessed by read operations.  
• ID/CFI: A flash memory array used for Infineon factory programmed device characteristics information. This  
area contains the device identification (ID) and common flash interface (CFI) information tables.  
• Secure silicon region (SSR): A 1024-byte one-time programmable non-volatile memory array used for Infineon  
factory programmed permanent data, and customer programmable permanent data.  
• Persistent protection bits (PPB): A non-volatile memory array with one bit for each sector. When programmed,  
each bit protects the related sector from erasure and programming.  
• PPB lock bit: A volatile register bit used to enable or disable programming and erase of the PPB bits.  
• Password: An OTP non-volatile array used to store a 64-bit password used to enable changing the state of the  
PPB lock bit when using password mode sector protection.  
• Dynamic protection bits (DYB): A volatile array with one bit for each Sector. When set, each bit protects the  
related sector from erasure and programming.  
• ECC status: Read the address of ECC corrected data and total ECC error count.  
• CRC: Read the CRC check-value.  
• Status or Peripheral Registers: Register access used to display EA status and read or write other registers.  
The flash memory array is the primary and default address space but, it may be overlaid by one other address  
space, at any one time. Each alternate address space is called an ASO.  
Each ASO replaces (overlays) either the sector selected by the command that enters the ASO or the entire flash  
device address range, depending on the ASO Entry command. If only one sector is overlaid by an ASO the  
remaining sectors of the memory array remain readable. Any address range not defined by a particular ASO  
address map, is reserved for future use. Unless otherwise stated all read accesses outside of an ASO address map  
returns non-valid (undefined) data. The locations will display actively driven data but their meaning is not  
defined.  
There are multiple address map modes that determine what appears in the flash device address space at any  
given time:  
• Read Mode  
• Status Register (SR) Mode  
• ASO Mode  
• Peripheral Register Mode  
Datasheet  
22  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Address space maps  
In Read Mode, the entire flash memory array may be directly read by the host system memory controller. The  
memory device EAC, puts the device in Read Mode during power-on, after a hardware reset, after a command  
reset, or after an EA is suspended. Read accesses and commands are accepted in Read Mode. A subset of  
commands is accepted in Read Mode when an EA is suspended.  
While in any mode, the Status Register read command may be issued to cause the Status Register ASO to appear  
at every word address in the device address space. In this Status Register ASO Mode, the device interface waits  
for a read access and, any write access is ignored. The next read access to the device accesses the content of the  
Status Register, exits the Status Register ASO, and returns to the previous (calling) mode in which the Status  
Register read command was received.  
Similarly, commands that read and write other registers use Peripheral Register Mode, in which the register  
appears in a temporary ASO that is automatically exited after the read or write of the command selected register.  
The read or write occurs in the last cycle of the Register Access command sequence.  
In EA Mode the EAC is performing an EA, such as programming or erasing a non-volatile memory array. While in  
EA Mode, none of the flash memory array is readable. While in EA Mode, only the Program / Erase Suspend  
command or the Status Register Read command will be accepted. All other commands are ignored. Thus, no  
other ASO may be entered from the EA Mode.  
In ASO Mode, one of the remaining overlay address spaces is entered (overlaid on the flash memory array address  
map). Only one ASO may be entered at any one time. Commands to the device affect the currently entered ASO.  
Only certain commands are valid for each ASO. These are listed in each ASO related section of Table 41.  
The following ASOs have non-volatile data that may be programmed to change 1s to 0s:  
• Secure silicon region  
• ASP Configuration Register (ASPR)  
• Persistent protection bits (PPB)  
• Password  
• Only the PPB ASO has nonvolatile data that may be erased to change 0s to 1s.  
When a program or erase command is issued while one of the non-volatile ASOs is entered, the EA operates on  
the ASO. The ASO is not readable while the EA is active. When the EA is completed the ASO remains entered and  
is again readable. Suspend and Resume commands are ignored during an EA operating on any of these ASOs.  
The Peripheral Register Mode is used to manage the POR Timer, Interrupt Configuration Register, Interrupt Status  
Register, Volatile Configuration Register, and the Non-volatile Configuration Register.  
5.1  
Flash memory array  
The S26KL/S26KS family has a uniform sector architecture with a sector size of 256 KB. The following tables show  
the sector architecture of the devices.  
A user configuration option is available to overlay either the first sector (SA00) or last sector (SAmax) with eight  
4-KB parameter-sectors. The parameter-sector address map showing how the lowest or highest sector is  
partitioned is shown in the following memory address map tables. The parameter-sectors can be erased and  
programmed in the normal manner using the standard erase and program command sequences targeting the  
appropriate parameter-sector addresses. Note that the smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as  
part of the address identifying the target parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
Configuring the first or last uniform sector to include the parameter sectors is accomplished with the Non-volatile  
Configuration Register.  
Note The following tables have been condensed to show sector related information for an entire device on a  
single page. Sectors and their address ranges that are not explicitly listed (such as SA001–SA510) have sector  
starting and ending addresses that form the same pattern as all other sectors of that size. For example, all 256-KB  
sectors have the pattern XX00000h–XX1FFFFh.  
Datasheet  
23  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Address space maps  
Table 7  
S26KL512S and S26KS512S sector and memory address map  
Sector  
count  
Sector  
range  
Sector size (KB)  
Address range (16-bit)  
Notes  
SA00  
:
0000000h–001FFFFh  
Sector starting address  
256  
256  
:
SA255  
1FE0000h–1FFFFFFh  
Sector ending address  
Table 8  
S26KL256S and S26KS256S sector and memory address map  
Sector  
count  
Sector  
range  
Sector size (KB)  
Address range (16-bit)  
Notes  
SA00  
:
0000000h–001FFFFh  
Sector starting address  
256  
128  
:
SA127  
0FE0000h–0FFFFFFh  
Sector ending address  
Table 9  
S26KL128S and S26KS128S sector and memory address map  
Sector  
count  
Sector  
range  
Sector size (KB)  
Address range (16-bit)  
Notes  
SA00  
:
0000000h–001FFFFh  
Sector starting address  
256  
64  
:
SA63  
07E0000h–07FFFFFh  
Sector ending address  
Table 10  
Main array sector 0 overlaid with eight 4-KB parameter-sectors  
Main array Parameter-sector  
Address size  
Address range (16-bit)  
Notes  
sector size  
number  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
0000000h–00007FFh  
0000800h–0000FFFh  
0001000h–00017FFh  
0001800h–0001FFFh  
0002000h–00027FFh  
0002800h–0002FFFh  
0003000h–00037FFh  
0003800h–0003FFFh  
Start of parameter-sector 0  
Parameter-sector 1  
Parameter-sector 2  
Parameter-sector 3  
Parameter-sector 4  
Parameter-sector 5  
Parameter-sector 6  
End of parameter-sector 7  
256 KB  
Exposed portion of  
main array sector 0  
Mapped to exposed portion  
of main array sector 0  
224 KB  
0004000h–001FFFFh  
Datasheet  
24  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Address space maps  
Table 11  
Last sector overlaid with eight 4-KB parameter-sectors  
Main array Parameter-sector  
Address size  
Address range (16-bit)  
Notes  
sector size  
number  
Expose portion of  
main array last  
sector  
Mapped to exposed portion  
of main array sector (last)  
224 KB  
xx00000h–xx1BFFFh  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
4 KB  
xx1C000h–xx1C7FFh  
xx1C800h–xx1CFFFh  
xx1D000h–xx1D7FFh  
xx1D800h–xx1DFFFh  
xx1E000h–xx1E7FFh  
xx1E800h–xx1EFFFh  
xx1F000h–xx1F7FFh  
xx1F800h–xx1FFFFh  
Start of parameter-sector 0  
Parameter-sector 1  
Parameter-sector 2  
Parameter-sector 3  
Parameter-sector 4  
Parameter-sector 5  
Parameter-sector 6  
End of parameter-sector 7  
256 KB  
5.2  
Device ID and CFI (ID-CFI) ASO  
There are two traditional methods for systems to identify the type of flash memory installed in the system. One  
is device identification (ID). The other method is called common flash interface (CFI).  
For ID, a command is used to enable an address space overlay where up to 16 word locations can be read to get  
JEDEC manufacturer identification (ID), device ID, and some configuration and protection status information  
from the flash memory. The system can use the manufacturer and device IDs to select the appropriate driver  
software to use with the flash device.  
CFI also uses a command to enable an ASO where an extendable table of standard information about how the  
flash memory is organized and operates can be read. With this method the driver software does not have to be  
written with the specifics of each possible memory device in mind. Instead the driver software is written in a more  
general way to handle many different devices but adjusts the driver behavior based on the information in the CFI  
table.  
Traditionally these two address spaces have used separate commands and were separate overlays. However, the  
mapping of these two address spaces are non-overlapping and so can be combined in to a single address space  
and appear together in a single overlay. Either of the traditional commands used to access (enter) the Autoselect  
(ID) or CFI overlay will cause the now combined ID-CFI address map to appear.  
The ID-CFI address map appears within, and overlays the flash memory array data of the sector selected by the  
address used in the ID-CFI enter command. While the ID-CFI ASO is entered the content of all other sectors is  
undefined.  
The ID-CFI address map starts at location zero of the selected sector. Locations above the maximum defined  
address of the ID-CFI ASO to the maximum address of the selected sector have undefined data. The ID-CFI enter  
commands use the same address and data values used on previous generation memories to access the JEDEC  
manufacturer ID (Autoselect) and CFI information, respectively.  
Table 12  
ID-CFI address map overview  
Word address  
Description  
Device ID (traditional autoselect values)  
CFI data structure  
Read / Write  
Read only  
Read only  
Read only  
(SA) + 0000h to 000Fh  
(SA) + 0010h to 0079h  
(SA) + 007Ah to 00FFh  
Undefined  
For the complete address map, see Table 35.  
Datasheet  
25  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Address space maps  
5.2.1  
Device ID  
The JEDEC standard JEP106T defines the manufacturer ID for a compliant memory. Common industry usage  
defined a method and format for reading the manufacturer ID and a device specific ID from a memory device. The  
manufacturer and device ID information is primarily intended for programming equipment to automatically  
match a device with the corresponding programming algorithm. Infineon has added additional fields within this  
32-byte address space.  
The original industry format was structured to work with any memory data bus width (for example: ×8, ×16, ×32).  
The ID code values are traditionally byte wide but are located at bus width address boundaries such that  
incrementing the device address inputs will read successive byte, word, or double word locations with the ID  
codes always located in the least significant byte location of the data bus. Because the device data bus is word  
wide, each code byte is located in the lower half of each word location. The original industry format made the  
high order byte always zero. Infineon has modified the format to use both bytes in some words of the address  
space. For the detail description of the device ID address map, see Table 35.  
5.2.2  
Common flash memory interface  
The JEDEC CFI specification (JESD68.01) defines a standardized data structure that may be read from a flash  
memory device, which allows vendor-specified software algorithms to be used for entire families of devices. The  
data structure contains information for system configuration such as various electrical and timing parameters,  
and special functions supported by the device. Software support can then be device-independent, device  
ID-independent, and forward-and-backward-compatible for entire flash device families.  
The system can read CFI information at the addresses within the selected sector as shown in “Device ID and  
Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map” on page 71.  
Similar to the device ID information, CFI information is structured to work with any memory data bus width (for  
example: ×8, ×16, ×32). The code values are always byte wide but are located at data bus width address  
boundaries such that incrementing the device address reads successive byte, word, or double word locations  
with the codes always located in the least significant byte location of the data bus. Because the data bus is word  
wide, each code byte is located in the lower half of each word location and the high order byte is always zero.  
For further information, refer to the CFI Specification, Version 1.5 (or later), and the JEDEC publications JEP137-A  
and JESD68.01.  
Datasheet  
26  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6
Embedded operations  
6.1  
Embedded algorithm controller (EAC)  
The EAC takes commands from the host system for programming and erasing the flash memory arrays and  
performs all the complex operations needed to change the nonvolatile memory state. This frees the host system  
from any need to manage the program and erase processes.  
There are five EAC operation categories:  
• Deep Power-Down (DPD)  
• Standby (Read Mode)  
• Address space switching  
• Embedded algorithms (EA)  
• Advanced sector protection (ASP) management  
6.1.1  
Deep power-down  
In the DPD mode, current consumption is driven to the lowest level. The DPD Mode must be entered while the  
device is in the Standby state while not in an ASO.  
6.1.2  
EAC Standby  
In the Standby state, current consumption is greatly reduced. The EAC enters its Standby state when no  
command is being processed and no EA is in progress. If the device is deselected (CS# = HIGH) during an EA, the  
device still draws active current until the operation is completed (ICC3). ICC4 in “DC characteristics (CMOS  
compatible)” on page 96 represents the standby current specification when both the Host Interface and EAC are  
in their Standby state.  
6.1.3  
Address space switching  
Writing specific address and data sequences (command sequences) switch the memory device address space  
from the flash memory array to one of the ASO’s.  
EA’s operate on the information visible in the currently active (entered) ASO. The system continues to have access  
to the ASO until the system issues an ASO Exit command, performs a hardware reset, or until power is removed  
from the device. An ASO Exit Command switches from an ASO back to the flash memory array address space. The  
commands accepted when a particular ASO is entered are listed between the ASO Enter and Exit commands in  
the command definitions table. See “Command summary” on page 77 for address and data requirements for  
all command sequences.  
6.1.4  
Embedded algorithms (EA)  
Changing the non-volatile data in the memory array requires a complex sequence of operations that are called  
EA’s. The algorithms are managed entirely by the device’s internal EAC. The main algorithms perform  
programming and erase of the main array data and the ASO’s. The host system writes command codes to the  
flash device address space. The EAC receives the commands, performs all the necessary steps to complete the  
command, and provides status information during the progress of an EA.  
Datasheet  
27  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2  
Program and erase summary  
Flash data bits are erased in parallel in a large group called a sector. The erase operation places each data bit in  
the sector in the logical 1 state (HIGH). Flash data bits may be individually programmed from the erased 1 state  
to the programmed logical 0 (LOW) state. A data bit of ‘0’ cannot be programmed back to ‘1. A succeeding read  
shows that the data is still ‘0. Only erase operations can convert ‘0’ to ‘1. Programming the same word location  
more than once with different 0 bits will result in the logical AND of the previous data and the new data being  
programmed.  
The duration of program and erase operations is shown in “Embedded algorithm performance” on page 113.  
Program and erase operations may be suspended.  
• An erase operation may be suspended to allow either programming or reading of another sector (not in the  
erase sector) in the erase operation. No other erase operation can be started during an erase suspend.  
• A program operation may be suspended to allow reading ofanother location (not in the line being programmed).  
• No other program or erase operation may be started during a suspended program operation; program or erase  
commands will be ignored during a suspended program operation.  
• After an intervening program operation or read access is complete the suspended erase or program operation  
may be resumed.  
• Program and Erase operations may be interrupted as often as necessary but in order for a program or erase  
operation to progress to completion there must be some periods of time between resume and the next suspend  
commands greater than or equal to tPRS or tERS in “Embedded algorithm performance” on page 113.  
• When an EA is complete, the EAC returns to the operation state and address space from which the EA was started  
(Erase Suspend or EAC Standby).  
The system can determine the status of a program or erase operation by reading the Status Register (“Error  
types and clearing procedures” on page 55).  
Any commands written to the device during the embedded program algorithm are ignored except the Program  
Suspend, and Status Read command.  
Any commands written to the device during the embedded erase algorithm are ignored except Erase Suspend  
and Status Read command.  
A hardware reset immediately terminates any in progress program / erase operation and returns to Read Mode  
after tRPH time. The terminated operation should be reinitiated once the device has returned to the Standby  
state, to ensure data integrity.  
For performance and reliability reasons programming is internally done on 16-byte half-pages, using an aligned  
16-byte address range.  
ICC3 in “DC characteristics (CMOS compatible)” on page 96 represents the active current specification for a  
write (Embedded Algorithm) operation.  
Datasheet  
28  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.1  
Program granularity  
The S26KL/S26KS supports two methods of programming, word or write buffer programming.  
Word programming examines the data word supplied by the command and programs 0’s in the addressed  
memory array word to match the 0’s in the command data word.  
Write buffer programming examines the write buffer and programs 0’s in the addressed memory array line to  
match the 0’s in the write buffer. The write buffer does not need to be completely filled with data. It is allowed to  
program as little as a single bit, several bits, a single word, a few words, a half-page, multiple half-pages, or the  
entire buffer as one programming operation. Use of the write buffer method reduces host system overhead in  
writing program commands and reduces memory device internal overhead in programming operations to make  
write buffer programming more efficient and thus faster than programming individual words with the Word  
Programming command.  
Each half-page can be programmed by either method. Half-pages programmed by different methods may be  
mixed within a Line.  
Word programming and write buffer programming, more than once within a half-page, is supported for legacy  
software compatibility. However, using word programming or write buffer programming more than once within  
a half-page without an erase will disable the device’s ECC functionality for that half-page. For applications  
requiring multiple programming operations within the same half-page, it is recommended to add system  
software error detection and correction, to enhance the data integrity of half-pages.  
Note If 2-bit ECC is enabled, multiple word programming or write buffer programming within the same page will  
result in a program error.  
Future silicon process generations of HYPERFLASH™ may no longer support multiple program operations, within  
the same half-page, without an erase operation on the sector containing the half-page. Planning for software  
migration to future generations should adopt data structures and data management methods that can support  
only one programming operation, per half-page, per erase.  
6.2.2  
Incremental programming  
The same word location or half-page may be programmed more than once, by either the word or write buffer  
programming methods, to incrementally change 1’s to 0’s. However as noted in “Program granularity” on  
page 29 incremental programming affects ECC syndrome bits and causes the device to disable ECC for that  
half-page.  
Note If 2-bit ECC is enabled, multiple word programming or write buffer programming within the same page will  
result in a program error.  
Datasheet  
29  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.3  
Program methods  
Word programming  
6.2.3.1  
Word programming is used to program a single word or a group of words anywhere in the flash memory arrays.  
The minimum Word Programming command sequence requires four command write transactions. The program  
command sequence is initiated by issuing two unlock command write transactions (transactions one and two),  
followed by the Program Set-Up command (transaction three). The program address and data are written next  
(transaction four), which in turn initiates the embedded programming algorithm. The system is not required to  
provide further controls or timing. The device automatically generates the program pulses and verifies the  
programmed cell margin internally. When the embedded programming algorithm is complete, the EAC then  
returns to its Standby State.  
The four transaction Word Programming command sequence described earlier is used to program a single  
(16-bit) word (two bytes). Multiple sequential words can be programmed with the Word Programming sequence  
by using the burst write capability. The Unlock and Program command sequence is identical to a single Word  
Programming sequence but during the data / address transaction multiple sequential data values are loaded  
during a single assertion of CS#. The data presented is programmed into sequential addresses starting with the  
target address identified in the command-address phase of the burst write transaction. A maximum of 256 words  
(512 bytes) can be programmed as long as an aligned 256-word (512-byte) address boundary is not crossed.  
The system can determine the status of the program operation by reading the Status Register. Refer to “Error  
types and clearing procedures” on page 55.  
Any commands other than Program Suspend and Status Register Read written to the device during the  
embedded program algorithm are ignored.  
Note that a hardware reset (RESET# = VIL) or power loss immediately terminates the programming operation and  
returns the device to Read Mode after tRPH time. The termination may leave the area being programmed in an  
intermediate state with invalid or unstable data values. Once the device has completed the hardware reset  
operation, the program command sequence may be reinitiated with the same data to complete the  
programming operation, to ensure the data is fully programmed. However, to ensure the best data integrity, the  
sector in which the program operation was terminated must be erased and re-programed.  
The Word Programming command may also be used when the SSR ASO is entered.  
A modified version of the Word Programming command, without unlock write cycles, is used for programming  
when entered into the ASP Configuration Register (ASPR), Password, and PPB ASOs. The same command is used  
to change volatile bits when entered in to the PPB Lock, and DYB ASOs. See Table 41 for Program Command  
sequences.  
Datasheet  
30  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
START  
Write Program  
Command Sequence  
Read Status Register  
Embedded  
Program  
Algorithm in  
Progress  
No  
No  
Done ?  
Yes  
Last Address ?  
Increment Address  
Yes  
Programming  
Completed  
Figure 14  
Word program operation  
6.2.3.2  
Write buffer programming  
A write buffer is used to program data within a 512-byte address range aligned on a 512-byte boundary (Line).  
Thus, a full write buffer programming operation must be aligned on a line boundary. Programming operations of  
less than a full 512 bytes may start on any word boundary but may not cross a line boundary. At the start of a write  
buffer programming operation all bit locations in the buffer are all 1’s (FFFFh words) thus any locations not  
loaded will retain the existing data. See Table 1 for information on address map.  
Write buffer programming allows up to 512 bytes to be programmed in one operation. It is possible to program  
from 1 bit up to 512 bytes in each write buffer programming operation. It is strongly recommended that a multiple  
of 16-byte half-pages be written and each half-page written only once. For the very best performance,  
programming should be done in full lines of 512 bytes aligned on 512-byte boundaries.  
Write buffer programming is supported only in the flash memory array or the SSR ASO.  
The write buffer programming operation is initiated by first writing two unlock cycles. This is followed by a third  
write cycle of the Write to Buffer command with the sector address (SA), in which programming is to occur. Next,  
the system writes the number of word locations minus one. This tells the device how many write buffer addresses  
will be loaded with data and therefore when to expect the Program Buffer to Flash Confirm command. The sector  
address provided in both the Write to Buffer command and the Write Word Count command must match. The  
sector to be programmed must be unlocked (unprotected). If a programming operation is attempted to a locked  
sector, the operation will be aborted and the failure will be indicated in the Status Register (see Table 17).  
The system then writes the starting address and data word. This starting address is the first address and data pair  
to be programmed, and selects the starting word address within the write buffer line. The sector address must  
match the Write to Buffer command Sector Address or the operation will abort and return to the initiating state.  
All subsequent single word address and data pair write transactions must be in sequential order. All write buffer  
addresses must be within the same line. If the system attempts to load data outside this range, the operation will  
abort and return to the initiating state. Note that linear burst sequence is not supported while loading the data  
words.  
Datasheet  
31  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
The word counter decrements for each data word loaded. Note that while counting down the data writes, every  
write is considered to be data being loaded into the write buffer. No commands are possible during the write  
buffer loading period. The only way to stop loading the write buffer is to write with an address that is outside the  
line of the programming operation. This invalid address will immediately abort the Write to Buffer command  
sequence and set the write buffer abort status bit (SR[3]).  
Once the specified number of write buffer locations has been loaded, the system must then write the Program  
Buffer to Flash command at the SA. The device then goes busy. The embedded program algorithm automatically  
programs and verifies the data for the correct data pattern. The system is not required to provide any controls or  
timings during these operations. If an incorrect number of write buffer locations have been loaded the operation  
will abort and return to the initiating state. The abort occurs as well when anything other than the Program Buffer  
to Flash is written when that command is expected at the end of the word count number of data words.  
The write-buffer embedded programming operation can be suspended using the Program Suspend command.  
When the embedded program algorithm is complete, the EAC then returns to the EAC Standby or Erase Suspend  
Standby state where the programming operation was started.  
The system can determine the status of the program operation by using the Status Register (see Table 17). See  
Figure 15 for a diagram of the programming operation.  
The write buffer programming sequence will be aborted under the following conditions:  
• Load a word count value greater than the buffer size (255).  
• Write an address that is outside the line provided in the Write to Buffer command.  
• The Program Buffer to Flash command is not issued after the write word count number of data words is loaded.  
When any of the conditions that cause an abort of write buffer command occur the abort will happen immediately  
after the offending condition, and will indicate a program fail in the Status Register at bit location 4 (PSB = 1) due  
to write buffer abort bit location 3 (WBASB = 1). The next successful program operation will clear the failure status  
or a Clear Status Register may be issued to clear the PSB status bit.  
The write buffer programming sequence can be terminated by the following: Hardware reset or power cycle.  
However, using either of these methods may leave the area being programmed in an intermediate state with  
invalid or unstable data values. In this case the same area will need to be reprogrammed with the same data or  
erased to ensure data values are properly programmed or erased. To ensure the best data integrity, the sector in  
which the program operation was terminated must be erased and re-programmed.  
Datasheet  
32  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Write “Write to Buffer”  
command Sector Address  
Write “Word Count”  
to program - 1 (WC)  
Sector Address  
Write Starting Address/Data  
Yes  
WC = 0?  
Write to a different  
Sector Address  
No  
Yes  
ABORT Write to  
Write to Buffer ABORTED.  
Must write “Write-to-Buffer  
ABORT RESET”  
command sequence to  
return to READ mode.  
Buffer Operation?  
No  
Note [33]  
Write next Address/Data pair  
WC = WC - 1  
Write Program Buffer to Flash  
Confirm, Sector Address  
Read Status Register  
Yes  
Yes  
DRB  
SR[7] = 0?  
No  
PSB  
SR[4] = 0?  
No  
Program Fail  
Program Successful  
WBASB  
Yes  
SR[3] = 1?  
No  
Yes  
SLSB  
SR[1] = 0?  
No  
Program aborted during  
Write to Buffer command  
Sector Locked Error  
Program Fail  
Figure 15  
Write buffer programming operation with Status Register[32, 33]  
Notes  
32.See Table 41 for the command sequence as required for write buffer programming.  
33.When the SA is specified, any address in the selected sector is acceptable. However, when loading  
write-buffer address locations with data, all addresses must fall within the selected line.  
Datasheet  
33  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Table 13  
Write buffer programming command sequence  
Sequence Address Data  
Comment  
Issue Unlock Command 1  
Issue Unlock Command 2  
555h  
2AAh  
AAh  
55h  
Issue Write to Buffer Command at Sector  
Address  
SA  
SA  
0025h  
WC  
Issue Number of Locations at Sector  
Address  
WC = number of words to program minus 1.  
Example:  
WC of 0 = 1 word to program  
WC of 1 = 2 words to program  
Starting  
address  
Selects a Line and loads first Address / Data  
Pair.  
All addresses must be within the selected Line  
boundaries, and have to be loaded in  
sequential order.  
Load Starting Address / Data Pair  
PD  
PD  
Load Next Address / Data Pair  
WBL  
All addresses must be within the selected Line  
boundaries, and have to be loaded in  
sequential order.  
This command must follow the last write buffer  
location loaded, or the operation will ABORT.  
Load Last Address / Data Pair  
WBL  
SA  
PD  
Issue Write Buffer Program Confirm at  
Sector Address  
0029h  
Device goes Busy  
Legend:  
SA = Sector Address (Non-Sector Address bits are ‘don’t care. Any address within the sector is sufficient.)  
WBL = Write Buffer Location (Must be within the boundaries of the line specified by the Starting Address.)  
WC = Word Count  
PD = Program Data  
Datasheet  
34  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.4  
Program Suspend / Program Resume commands  
The Program Suspend command allows the system to interrupt an embedded programming operation so that  
data can be read from any non-suspended Line. When the Program Suspend command is written during a  
programming process, the device halts the programming operation within tPSL (program suspend latency) and  
updates the status bits. Addresses are ‘don’t care’ when writing the Program Suspend command.  
After the programming operation has been suspended, the system can read array data from any non-suspended  
line. The Program Suspend command may also be issued during a programming operation while an erase is  
suspended. In this case, data may be read from any addresses not in Erase Suspend or Program Suspend.  
After the Program Resume command is written, the device reverts to programming and the status bits are  
updated. The system can determine the status of the program operation by reading the Status Register. Refer to  
“Error types and clearing procedures” on page 55 for information on these status bits.  
Accesses and commands that are valid during Program Suspend are:  
• Read to any other non-erase-suspended sector  
• Read to any other non-program-suspended line  
• Status Read command  
• Exit ASO or Command Set Exit  
• Program Resume command  
• Load Interrupt Configuration Register  
• Load Interrupt Status Register  
The system must write the Program Resume command to exit the Program Suspend Mode and continue the  
programming operation. Further writes of the Program Resume command are ignored. Another Program  
Suspend command can be written after the device has resumed programming.  
Program operations can be interrupted as often as necessary but in order for a program operation to progress to  
completion there must be some periods of time between resume and the Next Suspend command greater than  
or equal to tPRS in “Embedded algorithm controller (EAC)” on page 27.  
Program Suspend and Resume is not supported while entered in an ASO. While in Program Suspend Entry into  
ASO is not supported.  
6.2.5  
Blank Check  
The Blank Check command will confirm if the selected flash memory array sector is fully erased. The Blank Check  
command does not allow for reads to the array during the Blank Check. Reads to the array while this command  
is executing will return unknown data.  
To initiate a Blank Check on a sector, write 33h to address 555h in the sector, while the EAC is in the Standby state.  
The Blank Check command may not be written while the device is actively programming or erasing or suspended.  
Use the Status Register read to confirm if the device is still busy and when complete if the sector is blank or not.  
Bit 7 of the Status Register will show if the device is performing a Blank Check (similar to an erase operation).  
Bit 5 of the Status Register will be cleared to ‘0’ if the sector is erased and set to ‘1’ if not erased.  
As soon as any bit is found to not be erased, the device will halt the operation and report the results.  
Once the Blank Check is completed, the EAC will return to the Standby state.  
Datasheet  
35  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.6  
Evaluate Erase Status  
The Evaluate Erase Status (EES) command verifies that the last erase operation on the addressed sector was  
completed successfully. If the selected sector was successfully erased the sector erase status bit in the Status  
Register (SR[0]) is set to ‘1. If the selected sector was not completely erased SR[0] is cleared to ‘0. See Figure 16  
for details.  
The EES command can be used to detect erase operations that failed due to loss of power, reset, or failure during  
an erase operation.  
The EES command requires tEES to complete and updates the sector erase status bit in the Status Register (SR[0]).  
The device ready bit in the Status Register (SR[7]) may be read using the Read Status Register (70h) command to  
determine when the EES command has finished. Once the device ready bit in the Status Register indicates that  
the device has returned to the ready (1) state, the sector erase status bit (SR[0]) indicates whether the target  
sector was successfully erased. If a sector is found not erased with SR[0] = 0, the sector must be erased again to  
ensure reliable storage of data in the sector.  
Write Evalulate Erase  
Status Command (D0h)  
to target sector (SA)  
Read Status Register  
Busy ?  
SR[7]=0  
No  
Yes  
Prior Erase  
Corrupted ?  
SR[0]=1  
Yes  
No  
Prior Erase  
Unsuccessful  
Prior Erase Successful  
Figure 16  
Evaluate Erase Status software sequence  
Datasheet  
36  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.7  
Erase methods  
Chip Erase  
6.2.7.1  
The Chip Erase function erases the entire flash memory array. The device does not require the system to  
preprogram prior to erase. The embedded erase algorithm automatically programs and verifies the entire  
memory for an all 0 data pattern prior to electrical erase. After a successful chip erase, all locations within the  
device contain FFFFh. The system is not required to provide any controls or timings during these operations. The  
Chip Erase command sequence is initiated by writing two unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two  
additional unlock write cycles are then followed by the Chip Erase command, which in turn invokes the  
embedded erase algorithm.  
When the embedded erase algorithm is complete, the EAC returns to the Standby state. Note that while the  
embedded erase operation is in progress, the system cannot read valid data from the array. The system can  
determine the status of the erase operation by reading the Status Register. Refer to “Error types and clearing  
procedures” on page 55 for information on these status bits. Once the chip erase operation has begun, only a  
Status Read, Hardware Reset, or Power cycle are valid. All other commands are ignored. However, a Hardware  
Reset or Power Cycle immediately terminates the erase operation and returns to Read Mode after tRPH time. If a  
chip erase operation is terminated, the Chip Erase command sequence must be reinitiated once the device has  
returned to the Standby state to ensure data integrity.  
Sectors protected by the ASP DYB and PPB bits will not be erased. See “Software interface reference” on  
page 77. If a sector is protected during Chip Erase, Chip Erase will skip the protected sector and continue with  
next sector erase. The Status Register erase status bit and sector lock bit are not set to ‘1’ by a failed erase on a  
protected sector.  
6.2.7.2  
Sector Erase  
The Sector Erase function erases one sector in the memory array. The device does not require the system to  
preprogram prior to erase. The embedded erase algorithm automatically programs and verifies the entire sector  
for an all 0 data pattern prior to electrical erase. After a successful sector erase, all locations within the erased  
sector contain FFFFh. The system is not required to provide any controls or timings during these operations. The  
Sector Erase command sequence is initiated by writing two unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two  
additional unlock write cycles are then followed by the address of the sector to be erased, and the Sector Erase  
command.  
The system can determine the status of the erase operation by reading the Status Register. Refer to “Error types  
and clearing procedures” on page 55 for information on these status bits.  
Once the sector erase operation has begun, the Status Register Read and Erase Suspend commands are valid. All  
other commands are ignored by the embedded algorithm controller. However, note that a Hardware Reset  
immediately terminates the erase operation and returns to Read Mode after tRPH time. If a sector erase operation  
is terminated, the Sector Erase command sequence must be reinitiated once the device has reset operation to  
ensure data integrity.  
See “Embedded algorithm controller (EAC)” on page 27 for parameters and timing diagrams.  
Sectors protected by the ASP DYB and PPB bits will not be erased. See “Software interface reference” on  
page 77. If an erase operation is attempted to a locked sector the operation will be aborted and the failure will  
be indicated in the Status Register (see Table 17).  
Datasheet  
37  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Write Unlock Cycles:  
Address 555h, Data AAh  
Address 2AAh, Data 55h  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Write Sector Erase Cycles:  
Address 555h, Data 80h  
Address 555h, Data AAh  
Command Cycle 1  
Command Cycle 2  
Command Cycle 3  
Address 2AAh, Data 55h  
Specify first sector for erasure  
Sector Address, Data 30h  
Perform Write Operation  
Status Algorithm  
Status may be obtained by Status Register Polling.  
Yes  
Done?  
No  
Erase Error?  
Yes  
No  
Error condition (Exceeded Timing Limits)  
PASS. Device returns  
to reading array.  
FAIL. Write reset command  
to return to reading array.  
Figure 17  
Sector Erase operation  
Datasheet  
38  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.8  
Erase Suspend / Erase Resume  
The Erase Suspend command allows the system to interrupt a sector erase operation and then read data from,  
or program data to, the flash memory array. This command is valid only during sector erase or program  
operation. The Erase Suspend command is ignored if written during the chip erase operation.  
When the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase operation, the device requires a maximum  
of tESL (erase suspend latency) to suspend the erase operation and update the status bits.  
After the erase operation has been suspended, the part enters the Erase-Suspend Mode. The system can read  
data from or program data to the flash memory array. Reading at any address within erase-suspended sectors  
produces undetermined data. The system can determine if a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended by  
reading the Status Register. Refer to “Error types and clearing procedures” on page 55 for information on these  
status bits.  
After an erase-suspended program operation is complete, the EAC returns to the Erase-Suspend state. The  
system can determine the status of the program operation by reading the Status Register, just as in the standard  
program operation.  
If a program failure occurs during erase suspend the Status Register Clear or Software Reset commands will  
return the device to the erase suspended state. Erase will need to be resumed and completed before again trying  
to program the memory array.  
Accesses and commands that are valid during Erase Suspend are:  
• Read to any other non-suspended sector  
• Program to any other non-suspended sector  
• Status Read command  
• Exit ASO or Command Set Exit  
• Erase Resume command  
• SSR Entry  
• SSR Read  
• SSR Program  
To resume the sector erase operation, the system must write the Erase Resume command. The device will revert  
to erasing and the status bits will be updated. Further writes of the Resume command are ignored. Another Erase  
Suspend command can be written after the chip has resumed erasing.  
Note that the DYB ASO can not be entered while the device is in the Erase Suspend state.  
Datasheet  
39  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.9  
Volatile and Non-volatile Register summary  
Non-volatile Configuration Registers  
6.2.9.1  
Table 14  
Symbol  
Non-volatile Configuration Registers  
Width  
(bits)  
NV  
Default  
value  
Name  
Reference  
type  
“Non-volatile Configuration Register  
Non-volatile  
NVCR  
PASS  
16  
64  
P/E  
8EBBh and Volatile Configuration Register” on  
Configuration Register  
page 43  
FFFFFFFF  
Password Protection  
Register  
“Password Protection Mode” on  
page 66  
OTP  
FFFF  
FFFFh  
Persistent Protection  
Bits  
ASP Configuration  
Register  
1-bit per  
sector  
“Persistent Protection Bits (PPB)” on  
PPB  
P/E  
OTP  
OTP  
1
page 63  
“ASP Configuration Register” on  
page 65  
“Power-on (Cold) Reset (POR)” on  
page 101  
ASPR  
16  
16  
FEFFh  
PORTime Power-On Reset Time  
FFFFh  
6.2.9.2  
Volatile Configuration Registers  
Table 15  
Symbol  
Volatile Configuration Registers  
Width  
(bits)  
Default  
Name  
Reference  
Value  
Volatile Configuration  
Register 0  
“Non-volatile Configuration Register and  
Volatile Configuration Register” on page 43  
VCR  
16  
NVCR  
Dynamic Protection  
Bits  
PPB Lock Bit  
Interrupt Configuration  
Register  
1-bit per  
sector  
DYB  
PPBL  
ICR  
1
“Dynamic Protection Bits (DYB)” on page 63  
1
ASPR[2] “PPB Lock” on page 63  
FFFFh “INT# Output” on page 69  
16  
CRC Start Address  
Register  
CRC End Address  
Register  
CRCS  
CRCE  
26 (1 Gb) 3FFFFFFh “CRC check-value calculation” on page 8  
26 (1 Gb) 3FFFFFFh “CRC check-value calculation” on page 8  
Datasheet  
40  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.10  
Volatile Results and Status Registers  
Table 16  
Volatile Results and Status Registers  
Name  
Width (bits)  
Default value  
Reference  
Sector Lock Status  
Status Register  
Interrupt Status Register  
ECC Status Register  
3-bit per sector  
NA  
xx80h  
FFFBh  
NA  
See Note 85 for Table 41.  
16  
16  
16  
Table 17  
Table 34  
Error Lower Address Trap  
Register  
Error Upper Address Trap  
Register  
Read Check-Value Low  
Result Register  
Read Check-Value High  
Result Register  
16  
16  
16  
16  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Table 41  
Table 41  
“CRC Value Register” on  
page 50  
“CRC Value Register” on  
page 50  
6.2.11  
Status and Configuration Register definitions  
Status Register mode  
6.2.11.1  
The status of EA’s are provided by a single 16-bit Status Register. The Status Register Read command is issued  
followed by one read access of the Status Register information. The contents of the Status Register is aliased  
(overlaid) in all locations of the device address space. The overlay is in effect for one read access, specifically the  
next read access that follows the Status Register Read command. After the one Status Register access, the Status  
Register ASO is exited.  
The Status Register contains bits related to the results — success or failure — of the most recently initiated EA’s:  
• Erase Status (bit 5),  
• Program Status (bit 4),  
• Write Buffer Abort (bit 3),  
• Sector Locked Status (bit 1),  
• Sector Erase Status Bit (bit 0).  
and, bits related to the current state of any in process EA:  
• Device Busy (bit 7),  
• Erase Suspended (bit 6),  
• Program Suspended (bit 2),  
• CRC Calculation Suspended (bit 8)  
The current state bits indicate whether an EA is in process, suspended, or completed.  
The upper 7 bits (bits 15:9) are reserved. These have an undefined HIGH or LOW value that can change from one  
status read to another. These bits should be treated as ‘don’t care’ and ignored by any software reading status.  
The Clear Status Register command and the Software Reset command will clear to ‘0’ the results related bits of  
the Status Register (bits 5, 4, 3, 1, and 0) but will not affect the current state bits.  
Datasheet  
41  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Table 17  
Status Register  
Bit description  
Reserved  
Bit  
Reset  
status  
Busy  
Bit name  
Ready status  
number  
status  
[15:9]  
X
0
1
0
Invalid  
Invalid  
0
X
0 = No CRC in Suspension  
1 = CRC in Suspension  
1
0 = No Erase in Suspension  
1 = Erase in Suspension  
[8]  
CRC Suspend Status Bit CRCSSB  
[7]  
Device Ready Bit  
DRB  
Erase Suspend Status  
Bit  
[6]  
ESSB  
Invalid  
0 = Erase Successful  
1 = Erase Fail  
0 = Program Successful  
1 = Program Fail  
[5]  
[4]  
Erase Status Bit  
ESB  
PSB  
0
0
Invalid  
Invalid  
Program Status Bit  
0 = Program Not Aborted  
Write Buffer Abort  
Status Bit  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
WBASB  
PSSB  
0
0
0
Invalid 1 = Program Aborted during Write  
to Buffer Command  
Program Suspend  
Status Bit  
0 = No Program in Suspension  
1 = Program in Suspension  
Invalid  
0 = Sector Not Locked during  
Invalid Operation  
Sector Lock Status Bit  
SLSB  
1 = Sector Locked Error  
0 = Sector Erase Status Command  
Result = previous erase did not  
complete successfully  
[0]  
Sector Erase Status Bit  
ESTAT  
0
Invalid  
1 = Sector Erase Status Command  
Result = previous erase completed  
successfully  
Notes  
34.Bits 15 through 9 are reserved for future use and may display as ‘0’ or ‘1. These bits should be ignored  
(masked) when checking status.  
35.Bit 7 is ‘1’ when there is no EA in progress in the device.  
36.Bit 8 and bits 6 through 0 are valid only if Bit 7 is ‘1.  
37.All bits are put in their reset status by cold reset or warm reset.  
38.Bits 5, 4, 3, 1, and 0 are cleared to ‘0’ by the Clear Status Register command or Software Reset command.  
39.Upon issuing the Erase Suspend command, the user must continue to read status until DRB becomes ‘1.  
40.ESSB is cleared to ‘0’ by the Erase Resume command.  
41.ESB reflects success or failure of the most recent erase operation.  
42.PSB reflects success or failure of the most recent program operation.  
43.During Erase Suspend, programming to the suspended sector, will cause program failure and set the  
Program status bit to ‘1.  
44.During Erase Suspend, an erase operation will cause an erase failure and set the Erase status bit to ‘1.  
45.During Program Suspend, a programming operation will cause a program failure and set the Program  
status bit to ‘1.  
46.During Program Suspend, an erase operation will cause an erase failure and set the Erase status bit to ‘1.  
47.Upon issuing the Program Suspend command, the user must continue to read status until DRB becomes ‘1.  
48.PSSB is cleared to ‘0’ by the Program Resume command.  
49.SLSB indicates that a program or erase operation failed because the target memory region was locked.  
50.SLSB reflects the status of the most recent program or erase operation.  
51.CRCSSB – During a suspended CRC calculation only read operations from the array are allowed.  
Datasheet  
42  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.12  
Non-volatile Configuration Register and Volatile Configuration Register  
The Non-volatile Configuration Register (NVCR) and the Volatile Configuration Register (VCR) are used to define  
the operating conditions for the HYPERFLASH™ bus. Configurable characteristics include:  
1. Wrapped burst length (16-byte, 32-byte, or 64-byte wrapped burst).  
a.16-byte and 32-byte wrapped bursts behave in the legacy manner, 64-byte wrapped burst behave as shown  
in Table 22.  
2. Read latency (5 to 16 clocks to allow for initial read latency).  
3. Output driver drive strength.  
4. Whether the 4-KB parameter-sectors are used and how they are mapped into the address map.  
5. SSR Freeze bit to lock the secure silicon region.  
6. xVCR Freeze bit to lock the Volatile Configuration Register and the Non-volatile Configuration Register.  
The contents of the VCR and NVCR can be loaded and read back as described in Table 41. The HYPERFLASH™  
device uses the contents of the NVCR to define bus characteristics upon power-up or after a hardware reset. If the  
host system loads the VCR, the bus characteristics will be defined by the contents of the VCR (Figure 18). The  
NVCR is intended to hold a default setting to allow alignment with the host controller settings during boot  
operation. The VCR will often be updated with optimized settings during the boot process. The source for bus  
characteristics will shift from the NVCR (after power-up or hard reset) to the VCR once the VCR is loaded. Once  
the VCR is loaded only a power-up or hard reset will return bus characteristics back to the NVCR settings. When  
unlocked the VCR can be altered at any time while the device is idle.  
The number of times the NVCR can be erased and reprogrammed is defined by the NVCR spec. To assure  
consistent bus configuration during and after NVCR programming, the VCR should be used to define bus  
operating characteristics when programming the NVCR.  
Datasheet  
43  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Table 18  
xVCR Bit  
VCR and NVCR Configuration Register bit assignments  
Function  
Reserved  
Settings (Binary)  
xVCR[15]  
1 = Reserved (default)  
xVCR[14:12]  
Drive strength  
See Table 19.  
0 = VCR or NVCR locked (No programming or erasing of NVCR, no changes  
to VCR)  
xVCR[11]  
xVCR[10]  
xVCR freeze  
SSR freeze  
1 = VCR and NVCR unlocked (Factory default)  
0 = Secure silicon region locked (Programming not allowed)  
1 = Secure silicon region unlocked (Factory default)  
00 = Parameter-sectors and read password sectors mapped into lowest  
addresses  
01 = Parameter-sectors and read password sectors mapped into highest  
Parameter-sector addresses  
xVCR[9:8]  
xVCR[7:4]  
mapping  
10 = Uniform sectors with read password sector mapped into lowest  
addresses. (factory default)  
11 = Uniform sectors with read password sector mapped into highest  
addresses  
0000 = 5 clock latency  
0001 = 6 clock latency  
0010 = 7 clock latency  
0011 = 8 clock latency  
0100 = 9 clock latency  
...  
Read latency  
1011 = 16 clock latency (factory default)  
See Table 4.  
xVCR[3]  
xVCR[2]  
Reserved  
1 = Reserved (default)  
0 = RWDS will stall (remain LOW) upon dual error detect (default)  
1 = RWDS will not be stalled upon dual error detect  
RWDS stall control  
00 = Reserved  
01 = 64 bytes  
xVCR[1:0]  
Burst length  
10 = 16 bytes  
11 = 32 bytes (factory default)  
Note  
52.The placement of the Configuration Register bits are the same in both the Non-volatile and Volatile  
Configuration Registers.  
Datasheet  
44  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Table 19  
Drive strength code  
xVCR[14:12]  
Typical impedance 1.8 V VCC  
Q
Typical impedance 3 V VCC  
Q
Unit  
000 (default)  
001  
27  
117  
68  
45  
34  
27  
24  
20  
20  
71  
40  
27  
20  
16  
14  
12  
010  
011  
Ohms  
100  
101  
110  
111  
Non-Volatile  
Configuration Register  
Volatile  
Configuration Register  
Set  
Clear  
Clear  
Load Volatile Configuration Register  
Power-On Reset  
Hardware Reset  
CR Select Multiplexer  
DIR  
DIR=0=NVCR  
DIR=1=VCR  
Device Configuration  
Figure 18  
Table 20  
Configuration control[54, 55, 56]  
VCR and NVCR freeze bits immediately after power-up or hardware reset  
NVCR[11] bit  
VCR[11] bit  
NVCR  
VCR  
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Programmable / erasable  
Temporarily locked  
Programmable / erasable  
Permanently locked  
Settable / clearable  
Temporarily locked  
Settable / clearable[57, 59]  
Permanently locked[60]  
Notes  
53.Typical impedance measured at nominal VCCQ, 25 °C.  
54.A software reset will not change the state of the CR Select Multiplexer.  
55.Programming or erasure of the NVCR does not impact the contents of the VCR that has been previously  
loaded.  
56.If the VCR has not been loaded, programming of the NVCR will be result in the VCR being loaded with the new  
NVCR value.  
57.Programming / Erasing the NVCR will not impact behavior until after the next POR or hardware reset.  
58.Loading the VCR will impact behavior immediately.  
59.This state occurs after NVCR[11] = VCR[11] = 1 and the NVCR[11] bit is programmed. The state will only exist  
until the next POR or hardware reset. Thereafter NVCR[11] = VCR[11] = 0.  
60.This state occurs after POR or hardware reset when NVCR[11] was previously programmed.  
Datasheet  
45  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Table 21  
Example Burst sequences  
Wrap  
Start  
VCR / NVCR  
[1:0]  
CA[45] boundary  
(Bytes)  
address  
(Hex)  
Address sequence (Hex) (Words)  
03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F, 10, 11, 12,  
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, ...  
XX  
1
Linear  
XXXXXX03  
10  
10  
11  
11  
0
0
0
0
16  
16  
32  
32  
XXXXXX02 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 00, 01, ...  
XXXXXX0C 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F, 08, 09, 0A, 0B, ...  
XXXXXX0A 0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F, 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, ...  
XXXXXX1E 1E, 1F, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, ...  
03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F, 10, 11, 12,  
01  
01  
0
0
64  
64  
XXXXXX03  
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, 00, 01, 02, ...  
2E, 2F, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 3A, 3B, 3C, 3D,  
3E, 3F, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D, , ...  
XXXXXX2E  
Datasheet  
46  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
Table 22  
64-byte wrapped burst address sequence (latency code = 16)  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49 31  
48 30  
47 29  
46 28  
45 27  
44 26  
43 25  
42 24  
41 23  
40 22  
39 21  
2
3
2
4
3
2
5
4
3
2
6
5
4
3
2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
10  
9
8
7
6
5
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31  
30  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16  
...  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
X
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31  
30  
29  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
X
X
X
7
6
5
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
X
X
7
6
5
4
3
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
X
7
6
5
4
3
2
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
X
X
X
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
X
X
X
X
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
X
X
X
X
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
X
X
X
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
X
X
X
X
38 20  
37 19  
36 18  
4
3
2
1
Clock 35 17  
Latency  
Count  
cycle  
34 16  
33 15  
32 14  
31 13  
30 12  
29 11  
28 10  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
...  
0
0
X
X
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
X
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
X
X
X
X
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
0
1
0
2
1
0
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
3
2
1
0
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
8
7
6
5
0
8
7
6
5
31  
30  
29  
28  
4
3
2
4
3
8
7
4
8
31  
Bus turnaround  
+
Initial latency  
CA2  
3
2
2
1
1
0
CA1  
CA0  
Clock  
Cycle  
Latency  
Count  
Target  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
23  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
28  
30  
31  
Address  
Legend:  
X = marks idle periods on the bus when RWDS does not toggle. – = indicates that the 64-byte wrapped burst has completed.  
Table 23  
64-byte wrapped burst address sequence (latency code = 12)  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
6
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
5
5
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
4
4
4
12  
11  
10  
9
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
0
1
2
3
3
3
3
7
8
9
10  
9
11  
10  
9
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
0
1
2
2
2
2
6
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
0
1
1
1
1
5
6
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
0
0
0
0
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
7
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
5
5
5
0
1
2
3
4
4
4
4
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
0
1
2
3
3
3
3
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
0
1
2
2
2
2
6
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
0
1
1
1
1
5
6
7
8
Clock  
cycle  
Latency  
Count  
34  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
0
0
0
0
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
7
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
5
5
5
0
1
2
3
4
4
4
4
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
0
1
2
3
3
3
3
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
0
1
2
2
2
2
6
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
0
1
1
1
1
5
6
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
0
0
0
0
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
X
X
X
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
X
X
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
X
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
X
X
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
X
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
X
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
8
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
0
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
31  
30  
29  
28  
0
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
31  
30  
29  
0
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
31  
30  
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
31  
0
1
Table 23  
64-byte wrapped burst address sequence (latency code = 12) (Continued)  
15  
14  
13  
...  
3
1
0
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
8
7
9
8
10  
9
11  
10  
12  
11  
13  
12  
14  
13  
15  
14  
16  
15  
17  
16  
18  
17  
19  
18  
20  
19  
21  
20  
22  
21  
23  
22  
24  
23  
25  
24  
26  
25  
27  
26  
28  
27  
29  
28  
30  
29  
31  
30  
0
31  
12  
...  
2
Bus turnaround  
+
Initial latency  
CA2  
2
1
1
CA1  
0
CA0  
Target  
address  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
23  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
28  
30  
31  
Legend:  
X = marks idle periods on the bus when RWDS does not toggle. – = indicates that the 64-byte wrapped burst has completed.  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.12.1  
CRC Value Register  
The volatile CRC register (CRCR) stores the results of the CRC process that calculates the check-value on the data  
contained at the starting address through the ending address.  
Table 24  
CRC Value Register bit assignments  
Bit position CRC Value Low Result Register  
CRC Value High Result Register  
[15]  
[14]  
[13]  
[12]  
[11]  
[10]  
[9]  
[8]  
[7]  
[6]  
[5]  
R15  
R14  
R13  
R12  
R11  
R10  
R9  
R8  
R7  
R6  
R5  
R31  
R30  
R29  
R28  
R27  
R26  
R25  
R24  
R23  
R22  
R21  
R20  
R19  
R18  
R17  
R16  
[4]  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
R4  
R3  
R2  
R1  
[0]  
R0  
Note  
61.CRC value is a Volatile Register.  
Datasheet  
50  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.13  
ASO entry and exit  
ID-CFI ASO  
6.2.13.1  
The system can access the ID-CFI ASO by issuing the ID-CFI Entry command sequence during Read Mode. This  
entry command uses the Sector Address (SA) in the command to determine which sector will be overlaid. See the  
detail descriptions in Table 41, Table 12, “Device ID” on page 26, and “Common flash memory interface” on  
page 26.  
The ID-CFI ASO allows the following activities:  
• Read ID-CFI ASO, using the same SA as used in the Entry command.  
• ASO Exit.  
The following is a C source code example of using the CFI Entry and Exit functions. Refer to the Low Level Driver  
User Guide for general information on Cypress flash memory software development guidelines.  
/* Example: CFI Entry command */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x0098; /* write CFI entry command */  
/* Example: CFI Exit command */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x00F0; /* write cfi exit command */  
6.2.13.2  
Status Register ASO  
When the Status Register read command is issued, the current status is captured by the register and the ASO is  
entered. The first read access in the Status Register ASO exits the ASO and returns to the address space map in  
use when the Status Register read command was issued. No other command should be sent before reading the  
status to exit the Status Register ASO. The contents of the Status Register is only output as the first data value of  
a burst read, indeterminate data will be output during subsequent clock cycles.  
6.2.13.3  
Secure Silicon Region ASO  
The system can access the Secure Silicon Region by issuing the Secure Silicon Region Entry command sequence  
during Read Mode. This entry command uses the SA in the command to determine which sector will be overlaid.  
The Secure Silicon Region ASO allows the following activities:  
• Read Secure Silicon Region, using the same SA as used in the entry command. Reads within the overlaid SA but  
outside of the SSR will return indeterminate data.  
• Reads to a SA outside of the Secure Silicon Region will retrieve array data. A read from the array will not cause  
an exit from the SSR ASO.  
• Program the customer Secure Silicon Region using the Word or Write Buffer Programming commands.  
• ASO Exit using legacy Secure Silicon Exit command for backward software compatibility.  
• ASO Exit using the common exit command for all ASO – alternative for a consistent exit method.  
Datasheet  
51  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.13.4  
ASP Configuration Register (ASPR) ASO  
The system can access the ASP Configuration Register by issuing the ASP Configuration Register entry command  
sequence during Read Mode. This entry command does not use a sector address from the entry command. The  
ASP Configuration Register appears at word location 0 in the device address space. All other locations in the  
device address space are undefined.  
The ASP Configuration Register ASO allows the following activities:  
• Read ASP Configuration Register, using device address location 0.  
• Program the customer ASP Configuration Register using a modified Word Programming command.  
• ASO Exit using legacy Command Set Exit command for backward software compatibility.  
• ASO Exit using the common exit command for all ASO – alternative for a consistent exit method.  
6.2.13.5  
Password ASO  
The system can access the Password ASO by issuing the Password entry command sequence during Read Mode.  
This entry command does not use a sector address from the entry command. The Password appears at word  
locations 0 to 3 in the device address space. All other locations in the device address space are undefined.  
The Password ASO allows the following activities:  
• Read Password, using device address location 0 to 3.  
• Program the Password using a modified Word Programming command.  
• Unlock the PPB Lock Bit with the Password Unlock command.  
• ASO Exit using legacy Command Set Exit command for backward software compatibility.  
• ASO Exit using the common exit command for all ASO – alternative for a consistent exit method.  
6.2.13.6  
PPB ASO  
The system can access the PPB ASO by issuing the PPB Entry command sequence during Read Mode. This entry  
command does not use a sector address from the entry command. The PPB bit for a sector appears in bit 0 of all  
word locations in the sector.  
The PPB ASO allows the following activities:  
• Read PPB protection status of a sector in bit 0 of any word in the sector.  
• Program the PPB bit using a modified Word Programming command.  
• Erase all PPB bits with the PPB Erase command.  
• ASO Exit using legacy Command Set Exit command for backward software compatibility.  
• ASO Exit using the Common Exit command for all ASO – alternative for a consistent exit method.  
6.2.13.7  
PPB Lock ASO  
The system can access the PPB Lock ASO by issuing the PPB Lock Entry command sequence during Read Mode.  
This entry command does not use a sector address from the entry command. The global PPB lock bit appears in  
bit 0 of all word locations in the device.  
The PPB Lock ASO allows the following activities:  
• Read PPB Lock protection status in bit 0 of any word in the device address space.  
• Clear the PPB Lock bit using a modified Word Programming command.  
• ASO Exit using legacy Command Set Exit command for backward software compatibility.  
• ASO Exit using the Common Exit command for all ASO – alternative for a consistent exit method.  
Datasheet  
52  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.13.8  
Dynamic Protection Bits (DYB) ASO  
The system can access the DYB ASO by issuing the DYB entry command sequence during Read Mode. This entry  
command does not use a sector address from the entry command. The DYB bit for a sector appears in bit 0 of all  
word locations in the sector.  
The DYB ASO allows the following activities:  
• Read DYB protection status of a sector in bit 0 of any word in the sector  
• Set the DYB bit using a modified Word Programming command  
• Clear the DYB bit using a modified Word Programming command  
• ASO Exit using legacy Command Set Exit command for backward software compatibility  
• ASO Exit using the Common Exit command for all ASO – alternative for a consistent exit method  
6.2.13.9  
ECC Status ASO  
The ECC Status ASO displays the status of any error correction action when reading a half-page of the flash  
memory array. A single word of status is displayed at any word location within a half-page.  
The system can access the ECC Status ASO by issuing the ECC Status entry command sequence during Read  
Mode. This entry command does not use a sector address from the entry command. The ECC status bits for a  
half-page appears in bits 4, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of all word locations in the addressed half-page.  
The ECC Status ASO allows the following activities:  
• Read the ECC Status Register value for the addressed half-page  
• Read the Error-Detect Upper and Lower Address Trap Registers  
• Read the ECC Error Counter Register  
• ASO Exit  
6.2.13.10 CRC ASO  
Entering the CRC ASO enables the CRC related commands and reading of the CRC calculation result check-value.  
While the CRC calculation is not suspended the CRC ASO overlays the entire flash memory array. When the CRC  
calculation is suspended the flash memory array is visible for reading. Only reading of the memory array is  
supported while entered in the CRC ASO and the CRC calculation is suspended. The CRC ASO allows the following  
activities:  
• Load CRC beginning location  
• Load CRC ending location  
• CRC calculation suspend  
• Flash array read during suspend  
• CRC calculation resume  
• Read check-value result  
• Exit the CRC ASO  
Datasheet  
53  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.13.11 Software (command) Reset / ASO exit  
Software Reset is part of the command set (see Table 41) that also returns the EAC to Standby state and must be  
used for the following conditions:  
• Exit ID/CFI Mode  
• Clear timeout bit (DQ5) for data polling when timeout occurs  
Software Reset does not affect EA Mode. Reset commands are ignored once programming or erasure has begun,  
until the operation is complete. Software Reset does not affect outputs; it serves primarily to return to Read Mode  
from an ASO Mode or from a failed program or erase operation.  
Software Reset may cause a return to Read Mode from undefined states that might result from invalid command  
sequences. However, a Hardware Reset may be required to return to normal operation from some undefined  
states.  
There is no Software Reset latency requirement. The reset command is executed during the tWPH period.  
Datasheet  
54  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.14  
Error types and clearing procedures  
There are three types of errors reported by the embedded operation status methods. Depending on the error  
type, the status reported and procedure for clearing the error status is different. The following is the clearing of  
error status:  
• If an ASO was entered before the error the device remains entered in the ASO awaiting ASO read or a command  
write.  
• If an erase was suspended before the error the device returns to the erase suspended state awaiting flash array  
read or a command write.  
• Otherwise, the device will be in Standby state awaiting flash array read or a command write.  
6.2.14.1  
Embedded operation error (and invalid password)  
If an error occurs during an embedded operation (program, erase, blank check, or password unlock) the  
embedded algorithm controller remains active. The Status Register shows ready (SR[7] = 1) with valid status bits  
indicating the reason for the error. The embedded algorithm controller remains active until the error status is  
detected by the host system status monitoring and the error status is cleared.  
During embedded algorithm error status the Status Register will show the following:  
• SR[7] = 1; Valid status displayed  
• SR[6] = X; May or may not be erase suspended during the EA error  
• SR[5] = 1 on erase or blank check error, else = 0  
• SR[4] = 1 on program error or invalid password, else = 0  
• SR[3] = X; Treat as ‘don’t care’ (masked)  
• SR[2] = 0; No Program in suspension  
• SR[1] = 0  
• SR[0] = X; Treat as ‘don’t care’ (masked)  
When the embedded algorithm error status is detected, it is necessary to clear the error status in order to return  
to normal operation, ready for a new read or command write. The error status can be cleared by writing:  
• Reset command  
• Status Register Clear command  
Commands that are accepted during embedded algorithm error status are:  
• Status Register Read  
• Reset command  
• Status Register Clear command  
Datasheet  
55  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.2.14.2  
Protection error  
If an embedded algorithm attempts to change data within a protected area (program, or erase of a protected  
sector or OTP area) the device (EAC) goes busy for a period of 20 to 100 µs then returns to normal operation.  
Protection mechanisms include DYB, PPB, and locks. During the busy period the Status Register shows not ready  
with invalid status bits (SR[7] = 0). If a programming or erase operation is attempted to a locked region the  
operation will be aborted and the failure will be indicated in the Status Register (see Table 17).  
Commands that are accepted during the protection error status busy period are:  
• Status Register Read  
When the busy period ends the device returns to normal operation, and the Status Register shows ready with  
valid status bits. The device is ready for flash array read or write of a new command.  
After the protection error status busy period the Status Register will show the following:  
• SR[7] = 1; valid status displayed  
• SR[6] = X; may or may not be erase suspended after the protection error busy period  
• SR[5] = 1 on erase error, else = 0  
• SR[4] = 1 on program or password unlock error, else = 0  
• SR[3] = X; treat as ‘don’t care’ (masked)  
• SR[2] = 0; no program in suspension  
• SR[1] = 1; error due to attempting to change a protected location  
• SR[0] = X; treat as ‘don’t care’ (masked)  
Commands that are accepted after the protection error status busy period are:  
• Any command  
For cases where the program status bit is set a further program operation will immediately clear SR[4]. For cases  
where the erase status bit is set a further erase operation will immediately clear SR[6].  
6.2.14.3  
Write buffer abort  
If an error occurs during a Write to Buffer command the device (EAC) remains busy. The Status Register shows  
ready with valid status bits. The device remains busy until the error status is detected by the host system status  
monitoring and the error status is cleared.  
During embedded algorithm error status the Status Register will show the following:  
• SR[7] = 1; valid status displayed  
• SR[6] = X; m]ay or may not be erase suspended during the WBA error status  
• SR[5] = 0; erase successful  
• SR[4] = 1; programming related error, else = 0  
• SR[3] = 1; write buffer abort  
• SR[2] = 0; no Program in suspension  
• SR[1] = 0; sector not locked during operation  
• SR[0] = X; treat as ‘don’t care’ (masked)  
When the WBA error status is detected, it is necessary to clear the error status in order to return to normal  
operation, ready for a new read or command write. The error status can be cleared by writing:  
• Write Buffer Abort Reset command  
- Clears the status register and returns to normal operation  
• Status Register Clear command  
Datasheet  
56  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Commands that are accepted during embedded algorithm error status are:  
• Status Register Read  
- Reads the status register and returns to WBA busy state  
• Write Buffer Abort Reset command  
• Status Register Clear command  
During an embedded algorithm, read transactions not associated with a Status Register Read will toggle RWDS  
and return indeterminate data.  
6.2.14.4  
ECC error  
There are three methods for reporting to the host system when ECC errors are detected.  
• There is an ECC Status ASO that provides the status of any error detection or correction action taken when  
reading a half-page location within the ASO.  
• The Interrupt (INT#) output may be enabled to indicate when either a one or two bit error is detected as a  
half-page is read.  
• A mode may be enabled to cause the read write data strobe (RWDS) to stop toggling (stall) when reading a  
half-page containing a two bit error. The stall condition can be detected by the HYPERBUS™ master as a bus  
error when RWDS does not transition for more than 32 clock cycles.  
ECC Status Register (ECCSR)  
ECCSR does not have user programmable non-volatile bits, all defined bits are volatile read only status. The  
status of ECC in each half-page ECC unit is provided by the 16-bit ECC Status Register (ECCSR). The ECC Register  
Read command is written followed by an ECC unit address. The contents of the Status Register then indicates,  
for the selected ECC unit, whether there is an error in the ECC, the ECC unit data, or that ECC is disabled for that  
ECC unit. Results regarding 2-bit ECC detection (ECCSR[4]) and 1-bit ECC correction (ECCSR[3]) are global and not  
dependent on any specific ECC unit address.  
Table 25  
Bits  
ECC Status Register bit assignments  
Field  
Default  
state  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
[15:5]  
RFU  
Reserved  
Volatile, read only  
0
Reserved for Future Use  
1 = 2-bit ECC detection occurred since last  
ECC Status ASO exit  
0 = No 2-bit ECC detection occurred since  
last ECC Status ASO exit  
[4]  
2BD 2-bit ECC detection Volatile, read only  
0
1 = ECC correction performed since last  
ECC Status ASO exit  
1-bit ECC  
[3]  
[2]  
CB  
Volatile, read only  
Volatile, read only  
0
0
correction  
0 = No ECC correction performed since  
last ECC Status ASO exit  
1 = Single bit error found in the ECC unit  
error correction code  
0 = No error  
EECC  
Error in ECC  
1 = Single bit error correction in ECC unit  
Error in ECC unit  
data  
[1]  
[0]  
EECCD  
ECCD1  
Volatile, read only  
Volatile, read only  
0
0
data  
0 = No error  
1 = ECC is disabled in selected ECC unit  
0 = ECC is enabled in selected ECC unit  
ECC disabled  
Datasheet  
57  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
ECCSR[0] = 1 indicates the ECC is disabled in the ECC unit.  
ECCSR[1] = 1 indicates an error was corrected in the ECC unit data.  
ECCSR[2] = 1 indicates an error was corrected in the ECC syndrome.  
The default state of 0 for ECCSR[2:0] bits indicates no failures and ECC is enabled.  
ECCSR[3] = 1 indicates that an ECC correction has been performed since the last ECC Status ASO exit. An ECC  
Status ASO exit resets the ECCSR[3] value to the 0 state. Note that the ECC results for the current ECC Status Read  
may impact the ECCSR[3] bit.  
ECCSR[4] = 1 indicates that a 2-bit ECC detection has occurred since the last ECC Status Register ASO exit. An ECC  
Status ASO exit resets the ECCSR[4] value to the 0 state. Note that the ECCSR[3:1] bits are not valid if a 2-bit ECC  
event has occurred. If a 2-bit ECC detection has occurred the address accessed when the error was detected is  
trapped in a pair of registers. Note that the ECC results for the current ECC Status Read may impact the ECCSR[4]  
bit.  
The ECCSR[15:5] bits are reserved. These have undefined HIGH or LOW values that can change from one ECC  
status read to another. These bits should be treated as ‘don’t care’ and ignored by any software reading ECC  
status.  
The ECCSR is returned to the default state (0s) with a Hardware Reset or when the ECC Status ASO is exited with  
a Software-Reset / ASO-Exit command.  
Address Trap Register (ATR)  
A register is provided to capture the half-page address where an ECC error is first encountered during a read of  
the flash array. The 512-Mbit HYPERFLASH™ density devices only record the address where a two-bit error is  
encountered. All other HYPERFLASH™ devices may use the ASPR[13] configuration bit to enable the Address Trap  
Register to capture both 1-bit and 2-bit error locations. The Address Trap Register has a valid address when the  
ECC Status Register (ECCSR) bit 3 or 4 =1.  
The Error Lower Address Register and Error Upper Address Register contain the address that was accessed when  
the error is detected. The failing bits may not be located at the exact address indicated in the registers but will  
be located within the aligned 16-byte half-page where the error was detected. If errors are found in multiple  
half-pages during a single read operation the address of the first failing half-page address is captured in the Error  
Lower / Upper Address Registers. Only the address of the first enabled error type (2-bit or either 1-bit or 2-bit as  
selected in ASPR[13]) encountered after POR, hardware reset, or exit from the ECC ASO is captured. Each ECC ASO  
exit clears the address trap register and ECCSR[4:3] bits.  
When two-bit error detection is not enabled and the same half-page is programmed more than once, ECC error  
detection for that half-page is disabled so, no error can be recognized to trap the address.  
Datasheet  
58  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Table 26  
Density  
Error Upper / Lower Address Trap Register bit assignments  
Error Lower Address  
Error Upper Address Register  
Register  
All  
128 Mb  
256 Mb  
0
512 Mb  
0
[15]  
[14]  
[13]  
[12]  
[11]  
[10]  
[9]  
A15  
A14  
A13  
A12  
A11  
A10  
A9  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[8]  
[7]  
[6]  
[5]  
[4]  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
A8  
A7  
A6  
A5  
A4  
A3  
0
0
0
0
0
A24  
A23  
A22  
A21  
A20  
A19  
A18  
A17  
A16  
A23  
A22  
A21  
A20  
A19  
A18  
A17  
A16  
A22  
A21  
A20  
A19  
A18  
A17  
A16  
[0]  
0
Error detection counter  
The 512 Mb density HYPERFLASH™ devices do not support this feature. In HYPERFLASH™ devices other than the  
512 Mbit density, a counter is provided to keep track of the number of 1-bit or 2-bit errors that occur as half-pages  
are read from the flash array. Only errors recognized in the main array (no active ASO) will cause the error  
detection counter to increment. The counter does not increment while the ECC ASO is entered.  
The error detection counter is not cleared when the ECC ASO is exited. The counter will be set to ‘0’ on POR,  
Hardware Reset or with the Counter Clear command sequence. The Counter Read and Counter Clear command  
sequences operate only while in the ECC Status ASO. The 16-bit error detection counter will not increment past  
FFFFh. If the error count has increased since the last ECC ASO exit, the ECC Address Trap Register holds the valid  
address of the first ECC error found after the ECC ASO exit.  
Note that during continuous read operations when a 2-bit error is detected and RWDS stops toggling (stalls), the  
clock may continue toggling and the memory device will continue incrementing the data address and placing  
new data on the DQ signals; any additional half-pages with errors that are encountered will be counted until CS#  
is brought back HIGH.  
During a burst read transaction only one error is counted for each half-page found with an error. Each read  
transaction will cause a new read of the target half-page. If multiple read transactions access the same half-page  
containing an error, the error counter will increment each time that half-page is read.  
When two-bit error detection is not enabled and the same half-page is programmed more than once, ECC error  
detection for that half-page is disabled so, no error can be recognized or counted.  
RWDS Stall  
The RWDS Stall Control bit in xVCR[2] can be used to enable RWDS stall when a two bit error is encountered. If  
enabled (xVCR[2] = 0), upon DED, the RWDS will be driven LOW. RWDS will remain in the LOW state as long as CS#  
remains asserted, normal RWDS functionality resumes as soon as CS# returns HIGH. If the RWDS stall control bit  
is in the disabled state (xVCR[2] = 1) RWDS behavior is not impacted.  
Datasheet  
59  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.3  
Data protection  
6.3.1  
Secure silicon region (SSR)  
Each device has a 1024-byte one-time programmable SSR address space that is separate from the flash memory  
array. The SSR area is divided into 32, individually lockable, 32-byte aligned and length regions.  
In the 32-byte region starting at address zero:  
• The 16 lowest address bytes are programmed by Infineon with a 128-bit random number. Only Infineon is able  
to program these bytes. Attempting to program 0s into these locations will fail and generate a Program Status  
Error (SR[4] = 1).  
• The next 4 higher address bytes (SSR lock bytes) are used to provide one bit per SSR region to permanently  
protect each region from programming. The bytes are erased when shipped from Infineon. After an SSR region  
is programmed, it can be locked to prevent further programming, by programming the related protection bit  
in the SSR lock bytes.  
• The next higher 12 bytes of the lowest address region are Reserved for Future Use (RFU). The bits in these RFU  
bytes may be programmed by the host system but it must be understood that a future device may use those  
bits for protection of a larger SSR space. The bytes are erased when shipped from Infineon.  
The remaining regions are erased when shipped from Infineon, and are available for programming of additional  
permanent data.  
Refer to Figure 19 for a pictorial representation of the SSR memory space.  
The SSR memory space is intended for increased system security. SSR values, such as the random number  
programmed by Infineon, can be used to ‘mate’ a flash component with the system CPU / ASIC to prevent device  
substitution.  
The Configuration Register SSR Freeze (xVCR[10]) bit protects the entire SSR memory space from programming  
when cleared (or programmed for NVCR) to ‘0. This allows trusted boot code to control programming of SSR  
regions then set the freeze bit to prevent further SSR memory space programming during the remainder of  
normal power-on system operation.  
6.3.1.1  
Reading the secure silicon region memory space  
Reading the SSR region is performed once the SSR ASO is entered using the SSR entry sequence. The SSR is  
mapped to a specific sector identified during the SSR Entry command sequence. SSR Read operations within the  
sector identified during the SSR Entry command sequence but outside the valid 8-KB SSR address range will yield  
indeterminate data. Reads to sectors not overlaid by the SSR ASO will retrieve array data. A SSR Exit sequence  
will return the device to the array read ASO.  
Datasheet  
60  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.3.1.2  
Programming secure silicon region memory space  
Programming the SSR memory is performed once the SSR ASO is entered using the SSR Entry sequence. The  
protocol of the SSR programming command is the same as normal array programming. The SSR programing  
sequences can be issued multiple times to any given SSR address, but this address space can never be erased.  
The valid address range for SSR program is depicted in Figure 19. SSR program operations outside the valid SSR  
address range will ignore address A9 and higher and will alias into the valid SSR address range. SSR program  
operations while Freeze = 0 will fail with no indication of the failure. The SSR address space is not protected by  
the selection of an ASP Protection Mode. The Freeze SSR bit (xVCR.10) may be used to protect the SSR address  
space. A SSR Exit sequence will return the device to the Read Mode.  
32-byte OTP Region 31  
32-byte OTP Region 30  
32-byte OTP Region 29  
When programmed to 0, each  
lock bit protects its related 32  
byte OTP region from any further  
programming  
.
.
.
32-byte OTP Region 3  
32-byte OTP Region 2  
32-byte OTP Region 1  
32-byte OTP Region 0  
Region 0 Expanded View  
...  
Reserved  
16-byte Random Number  
Lock Bits 31 to 0  
Byte 0h  
Byte 10h  
Byte 1Fh  
Figure 19  
SSR address space  
Table 27  
Region  
SSR address map  
Byte address range  
(Hex)  
Contents  
Initial delivery state (Hex)  
Least significant byte of Infineon  
programmed random number  
0000h  
...  
Infineon programmed random  
number  
...  
Most significant byte of Infineon  
programmed random number  
000Fh  
Region locking bits  
Byte 10 [bit 0] locks region 0 from  
programming when = 0  
...  
Byte 13 [bit 7] locks region 31from  
programming when = 0  
Region 0  
0010h–0013h  
All bytes = FFh  
0014h–001Fh  
0020h–003Fh  
0040h–005Fh  
...  
Reserved for Future Use (RFU)  
Available for user programming  
Available for user programming  
Available for user programming  
Available for user programming  
All bytes = FFh  
All bytes = FFh  
All bytes = FFh  
All bytes = FFh  
All bytes = FFh  
Region 1  
Region 2  
...  
Region 31  
03E0h–03FFh  
Datasheet  
61  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.3.2  
Advanced sector protection (ASP)  
Advanced sector protection (ASP) is a set of independent hardware and software methods used to disable or  
enable programming or erase operations, individually, in any or all sectors. This section describes the various  
methods of protecting data stored in the memory array. An overview of these methods is shown in Figure 20.  
ASP Configuration Register  
(One-Time Programmable)  
Password Protection  
Persistent Protection  
Method Lock Bit  
Method Lock Bit  
(ASPR[2]=0)  
(ASPR[1]=0)  
Password Register (64b)  
(One-Time Protect)  
1. Bit is volatile, POR setting depends on protection method:  
Persistent Protection Method defaults to 1.  
1, 2, 3  
PPB Lock Bit  
0 = PPBs Locked  
Password Protection Method defaults to 0.  
2. Clearing to 0 locks all PPBs to their current state.  
3. Once cleared to 0, requires power cycle to unlock.  
1 = PPBs Unlocked  
Persistent Protection Bits  
Dynamic Protection Bits  
Memory Array  
(PPB) 5, 6  
PPB 0  
(DYB) 7, 8, 9  
DYB 0  
Sector 0  
Sector 1  
Sector 2  
PPB 1  
PPB 2  
DYB 1  
DYB 2  
Sector N-2  
Sector N-1  
PPB N-2  
PPB N-1  
PPB N  
DYB N-2  
DYB N-1  
DYB N  
Sector N 4  
4. N = Highest Address Sector.  
5. 0 = Sector Protected (Programmed)  
1 = Sector Unprotected (Erased)  
6. PPBs set (programmed) individually, but cleared  
(erased) collectively.  
7. 0 = Sector Protected  
1 = Sector Unprotected  
8. Protect effective only if corresponding PPB is 1  
(unprotected).  
9. Volatile Bits: default to set (unprotected) upon power-up.  
Figure 20  
Advanced sector protection overview  
Every flash memory array sector has a non-volatile (PPB) and a volatile (DYB) protection bit associated with it.  
When either bit is ‘0, the associated sector is protected from program and erase operations.  
The PPB bits are protected from program and erase when the PPB lock bit is ‘0. There are two methods for  
managing the state of the PPB lock bit, Persistent Protection and Password Protection.  
The Persistent Protection method sets the PPB lock bit to ‘1’ during POR or hardware reset so that the PPB bits  
are unprotected by a device reset. Software reset does not affect the PPB lock bit. There is a command to clear  
the PPB lock bit to ‘0’ to protect the PPB. There is no command in the Persistent Protection method to set the  
PPB lock bit therefore the PPB lock bit will remain at ‘0’ until the next power-off or hardware reset. The Persistent  
Protection method allows boot code the option of changing sector protection by programming or erasing the  
PPB, then protecting the PPB from further change for the remainder of normal system operation by clearing (to  
‘0’) the PPB lock bit. This is sometimes called Boot-Code Controlled Sector Protection.  
The Password method clears the PPB lock bit to ‘0’ during POR or hardware reset to protect the PPB. A 64-bit  
password may be permanently programmed and hidden for the Password method. A command can be used to  
provide a password for comparison with the hidden password. If the password matches the PPB lock bit is set to  
‘1’ to unprotect the PPB. A command can be used to clear the PPB lock bit to ‘0. This method requires use of a  
password to control PPB Protection.  
The selection of the PPB Lock Management method is made by programming OTP bits in the ASP Configuration  
Register so as to permanently select the method used.  
The PPB bits are erased so that all flash memory array sectors are unprotected when shipped from Infineon.  
Datasheet  
62  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.3.3  
PPB Lock  
The persistent protection lock bit is a volatile bit for protecting all PPB bits. When cleared to ‘0, it locks all PPBs  
and when set to ‘1, it allows the PPBs to be changed. There is only one PPB lock bit per device.  
The PPB Lock command is used to clear the bit to ‘0. The PPB lock bit must be cleared to ‘0’ only after all the  
PPBs are configured to the desired settings.  
In Persistent Protection Mode, the PPB lock bit is set to ‘1’ during POR or a hardware reset. When cleared with the  
PPB Lock Bit Clear sequence, no software command sequence can set the PPB lock bit, only another hardware  
reset or power-up can set the PPB lock bit.  
In the Password Protection Mode, the PPB lock bit is cleared to ‘0’ during POR or a hardware reset. The PPB lock  
bit can only set to ‘1’ by the Password Unlock command sequence. The PPB lock bit can be cleared back to ‘0’  
with the PPB Lock Bit Clear sequence.  
6.3.4  
Persistent Protection Bits (PPB)  
The Persistent Protection Bits (PPB) are located in a separate non-volatile flash array. One of the PPB bits is  
assigned to each sector. When a PPB is programmed to ‘0, its related sector is protected from program and erase  
operations. The PPB are programmed individually but must be erased as a group, similar to the way individual  
words may be programmed in the main array but an entire sector must be erased at the same time.  
Pre-programming and verification prior to erasure are handled by the EAC.  
Programming a PPB bit requires the typical word programming time. During a PPB bit programming operation  
or PPB bit erasing, the Status Register can be accessed to determine when the operation has completed. Erasing  
all the PPBs requires typical sector erase time.  
If the PPB lock bit is ‘0, the PPB Program or Erase command does not execute and times-out without  
programming or erasing the PPB. If an program or erase operation is attempted to the PPB bits when the PPB  
lock bit is ‘0, the operation will be aborted and the failure will be indicated in the Status Register (see Table 17).  
The protection state of a PPB for a given sector can be verified by writing a PPB Status Read command when  
entered in the PPB ASO.  
6.3.5  
Dynamic Protection Bits (DYB)  
Dynamic Protection Bits are volatile and unique for each sector and can be individually modified. DYBs only  
control protection for sectors that have their PPBs cleared. By issuing the DYB Set or Clear command sequences,  
the DYB are set to ‘0’ or cleared to ‘1, thus placing each sector in the protected or unprotected state respectively.  
This feature allows software to easily protect sectors against inadvertent changes, yet does not prevent the easy  
removal of protection when changes are needed.  
The DYB can be set to ‘0’ or cleared to ‘1’ as often as needed.  
Datasheet  
63  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.3.6  
Sector Protection States summary  
Each sector can be in one of the following protection states:  
• Unlocked – The sector is unprotected and protection can be changed by a simple command. The protection  
state defaults to unprotected after a power cycle or hardware reset.  
• Dynamically Locked – A sector is protected and protection can be changed by a simple command. The protection  
state is not saved across a power cycle or hardware reset.  
• Persistently Locked – A sector is protected and protection can only be changed if the PPB lock bit is set to ‘1.  
The protection state is non-volatile and saved across a power cycle or hardware reset. Changing the protection  
state requires programming or erase of the PPB bits.  
Table 28  
Sector protection states  
Protection bit values  
Sector state  
PPB lock bit  
PPB  
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
DYB  
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Unprotected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Unprotected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Datasheet  
64  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.3.7  
ASP Configuration Register  
The ASP Configuration Register (ASPR) holds the non-volatile OTP bits for controlling security management.  
Table 29  
Bit  
ASP Configuration Register  
Default value  
Name  
[15:14]  
1
1
1
1
Reserved  
1-bit Address Trap Enable (not available on the 512-Mb device)  
ASPR[13] = 0: Address Trap Register will trap both 1-bit and 2-bit errors  
ASPR[13] = 1: Address Trap Register only traps 2-bit errors (legacy  
functionality)  
Reserved  
Hybrid Burst Type Enable  
ASPR[11] = 0: Hybrid – One Wrapped burst sequence followed by linear  
burst  
ASPR[11] = 1: Legacy – Wrapped burst sequence only  
[13]  
[12]  
[11]  
[10]  
[9]  
1
1
Reserved  
DED / ECC On-Off Bit  
ASPR[9] = 0: ECC On-Off Bit Disabled, Dual Error Detect Enabled  
ASPR[9] = 1: ECC On-Off Bit Enabled, Dual Error Detect Disabled (default)  
[8]  
[7]  
[6]  
0
X
1
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Read Password Mode Enable  
ASPR[5] = 0: Read Password Mode Permanently Enabled  
ASPR[5] = 1: Read Password Mode Disabled (default from factory)  
[5]  
1
[4]  
[3]  
1
1
Reserved  
Reserved  
Persistent / Password Protection Mode Lock Bits  
ASPR[2:1] = 00: Not allowed  
[2:1]  
[0]  
1
1
ASPR[2:1] = 01: Password Mode Permanently Enabled, ASPR Frozen  
ASPR[2:1] = 10: Persistent Mode Permanently Enabled, ASPR Frozen  
ASPR[2:1] = 11: Persistent Mode Temporarily Enabled (default from factory)  
Reserved  
As shipped from the factory, all devices default to the Persistent Protection method, with all sectors unprotected,  
when power is applied. The device programmer or host system can then choose which sector protection method  
to use. Programming either of the following two, one-time programmable, non-volatile bits, locks the part  
permanently in that mode:  
• Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit (ASPR[1])  
• Password Protection Mode Lock Bit (ASPR[2])  
If both lock bits (ASPR[2] and ASPR[1]) are selected to be programmed at the same time, the operation will abort  
and Status Register bits SR[4] and SR[1] will be set to indicate the failure. Once the Password Mode Lock Bit is  
programmed, the Persistent Mode Lock Bit is permanently disabled and no changes to the protection scheme  
are allowed. Similarly, if the Persistent Mode Lock Bit is programmed, the Password Mode is permanently  
disabled. Programming attempts to the ASPR after either ASPR[2] or ASPR[1] have been programmed will be  
aborted and Status Register bits SR[4] and SR[1] will be set to indicate the failure.  
Datasheet  
65  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
If the Password Mode is chosen, the password must be programmed prior to setting the corresponding Lock  
Register Bit. The four-word password must be programmed in order in a 0-1-2-3 sequence, other programming  
sequences will result in undefined behavior. After the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit is programmed, a  
power cycle, hardware reset, or PPB Lock Bit Set command is required to set the PPB lock bit to ‘0’ to protect the  
PPB array.  
The programming time of the ASP Configuration Register is the same as the typical word programming time.  
During a ASP Configuration Register programming EA. The system can also determine the status of the ASPR  
programming by reading the Status Register. See “Error types and clearing procedures” on page 55 for  
information on these status bits.  
6.3.8  
Persistent Protection Mode  
The Persistent Protection method sets the PPB lock bit to ‘1’ during POR or hardware reset so that the PPB bits  
are unprotected by a device reset. There is a command to clear the PPB lock bit to ‘0’ to protect the PPB. There  
is no command in the Persistent Protection method to set the PPB lock bit to ‘1’ therefore the PPB lock bit will  
remain at ‘0’ until the next power-off or hardware reset.  
6.3.9  
Password Protection Mode  
Password Protection Mode allows an even higher level of security than the Persistent Sector Protection Mode, by  
requiring a 64-bit password for setting the PPB lock bit. In addition to this password requirement, after power-up  
or hardware reset, the PPB lock bit is cleared to ‘0’ to ensure protection at power-up. Successful execution of the  
Password Unlock command by entering the entire password sets the PPB lock bit to ‘1, allowing for sector PPB  
modifications.  
Password Protection Notes:  
• The Password Program Command is only capable of programming 0’s.  
• The password is all 1’s when shipped from Infineon. It is located in its own memory space and is accessible  
through the use of the Password Program and Password Read commands.  
• All 64-bit password combinations are valid as a password.  
• Once the Password is programmed and verified, the Password Protection Mode Locking Bit must be  
programmed (to ‘0’) in order to prevent reading the password.  
• The Password Protection Mode Lock Bit, once programmed (to ‘0’), prevents reading the 64-bit password on  
the data bus and further password programming. All further program and read commands to the password  
region are disabled and these commands are ignored. Attempted programming of a protected Password will  
set the Sector Lock Status Bit (SR[1]) and the Program Status Bit (SR[4]). If a further programming operation is  
attempted on either the Password or the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit the operation will be aborted and  
the failure will be indicated in the Status Register (see Table 17). There is no means to verify what the password  
is after the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit is programmed. Password verification is only allowed before  
selecting the Password Protection Mode.  
• The Password Mode Lock Bit is not erasable.  
• For the unlocking function to occur, the password portion can be entered in any order as long as the entire 64-bit  
password is entered. If the Password Unlock command provided password does not match the hidden internal  
password, the unlock operation fails in the same manner as a programming operation on a protected sector.  
The Status Register will return to the ready state with the Program Status Bit set to ‘1’ indicating a failed  
programming operation due to a locked sector. In this case it is a failure to change the state of the PPB lock bit  
because it is still protected by the lack of a valid password.  
• The device requires approximately tPSWD = 100 µs for setting the PPB lock bit after the valid 64-bit password is  
given to the device.  
Datasheet  
66  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
• The Password Unlock command cannot be accepted any faster than once every tPSWD (see Table 64). This makes  
it take an unreasonably long time (58 million years) for a hacker to run through all the 64-bit combinations in  
an attempt to correctly match a password. The EA status checking methods may be used to determine when  
the EAC is ready to accept a new password command.  
• If the password is lost after setting the Password Mode Lock Bit, there is no way to clear the PPB lock bit.  
6.3.10  
Read Password Protection Mode  
The Read Password Mode can replace the default “Password Protection Mode” on page 66. The Read Password  
Mode is enabled to replace the default PPB Password Protection Mode when the user programs ASPR[5] = 0. The  
Read Password Mode is not active until the password is programmed and ASPR[2] is programmed to ‘0.  
The Read Password Protection Mode enables protecting the flash memory array from read, program and erase.  
Only the lowest or highest (256-KB) sector address range, selected by the Non-volatile Configuration Register bits  
xVCR[9:8], remains readable until a successful Password Unlock command is completed. Note that reads from  
the read-protected portion of the array will alias back to the readable sector.  
In this mode the PPB lock bit is used to control the high order bits of address. When the PPB lock bit is ‘1, the  
address bits operate normally. When the PPB lock bit is ‘0, the address bits that select a main array sector address  
range are forced either to 0s (xVCR[9:8] = 00 or 10) or to 1s (xVCR[9:8] = 01 or 11) to select the lowest or highest  
address flash memory array address range per the table below. When xVCR[9:8] = 00 or 10, the bottom (zero  
address) 256 KB of the array is readable. When xVCR[9:8] = 01 or 10, the top (maximum address) 256 KB of the  
array is readable.  
Table 30  
ASPR bit  
2
ASP Configuration Register selection of Persistent and Password Protection Modes  
Default value  
Name  
1
Persistent / Password Protection Mode Lock Bits  
ASPR[2:1] = 00: Not allowed  
ASPR[2:1] = 01: Password Mode Permanently Enabled  
ASPR[2:1] = 10: Persistent Mode Permanently Enabled  
ASPR[2:1] = 11: Persistent Mode Temporarily Enabled (default from factory)  
1
1
Table 31  
xVCR bit  
xVCR mapping of boot block address range  
Default value  
Name  
00 - Map Parameter-Sectors and Read Password Sectors mapped into lowest  
addresses.  
01 - Map Parameter-Sectors and Read Password Sectors mapped into highest  
addresses.  
xVCR[9:8]  
11  
10 - Uniform Sectors with Read Password Sector mapped into lowest  
addresses.  
11 - Uniform Sectors with Read Password Sector mapped into highest  
addresses.  
The PPB bits are protected from program and erase when the PPB lock bit is ‘0’ and may be programmed or  
erased when the PPB lock bit is ‘1.  
The PPB lock bit is set to ‘0’ by POR or hardware reset, same as in PPB Password Protection Mode.  
Read Password Protection Notes  
• When the Read Password OPN option is ordered, the user can program the ASPR[5] bit to ‘0’ and use Read  
Password, or not, as desired.  
• The command sequence for programming, reading, and locking of the Password for Read Password Method is  
the same as the default for the PPB Password Method.  
Datasheet  
67  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
• When the Read Password Mode and Password Protection Mode are enabled (i.e. ASPR[2] and ASPR[5] are  
programmed to ‘0’), then all addresses are redirected to the boot sector until the password unlocking sequence  
is properly entered, with the correct password. At which time, the Read Password Mode is disabled and all  
addressing will select the proper location.  
• If a system hardware reset occurs, then the Read Password Mode is re-enabled.  
• ASPR[5] is used to select between Read Password versus PPB Password options. If ASPR[5] = 0 then the device  
is ready for Read Password. However, Read Password is not enabled until ASPR[2] = 0. At which point, all  
addresses select only within the top or bottom sectors, until the device is unlocked with the proper unlocking  
sequence and password. When ASPR[2] = 1 the addresses select normally. This allows users to program in code,  
test it, provide a password, and then lock it by programming ASPR[2] = 0.  
• The Read Password command sequence return undefined results if sent when Read Password Protection is in  
use. The PPB lock bit may only be returned to ‘0’ by a Hardware Reset, POR or the PPB Lock Bit Clear command  
sequence.  
• Only the ID Read command, Password Unlock command and array reads are valid during Read Password Mode  
while the PPB lock bit = 0. Other commands are disabled until the password is supplied to enable reading of the  
entire device and normal command operation.  
• When Read Password Protection Mode is active (ASPR[5] = 0, ASPR[2] = 0, PPB Lock Bit = 0), reading of the main  
array is allowed but forced to have only the boot sector visible via the forcing of memory sector address to 0 or  
1s. Reading the DYB, or PPB address space returns undefined data.  
• Programming memory spaces or writing registers is not allowed when Read Password Protection Mode is active.  
RESET operates normally, and bus protocol may be modified by resetting mode bits.  
6.3.11  
Hybrid Burst  
An additional type of burst that combines one wrapped burst followed by linear burst, is supported by all  
members of the HYPERFLASH™ family.  
The beginning of a hybrid burst will wrap once within the target address wrapped burst length group, before  
switching to linear burst of data beyond the end of the initial wrapped burst length group. Hybrid burst is  
supported for 16-byte and 32-byte but not 64-byte wrapped burst length groups.  
Table 32  
Bit  
ASPR bit assignment for hybrid burst type enable  
Default value  
Name  
Hybrid Burst Type Enable  
0 = Hybrid - One Wrapped burst sequence followed by linear burst  
1 = Legacy - Wrapped burst sequence only  
[11]  
1
Example burst sequences for 32-byte, and 16-byte hybrid burst reads:  
1. 32-byte example (wrap within 32-byte boundary before transitioning to linear burst)  
a. 06-07-08-09-0A-0B-0C-0D-0E-0F-00-01-02-03-04-05-10-11  
a. 0E-0F-00-01-02-03-04-05-06-07-08-09-0A-0B-0C-0D-10-11  
2. 16-byte example (wrap within 16-byte boundary before transitioning to linear burst)  
a. 06-07-00-01-02-03-04-05-08-09  
b. 03-04-05-06-07-00-01-02-08-09  
Datasheet  
68  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
6.3.12  
INT# Output  
The INT# pin is an open-drain output used to indicate to the host system that an event has occurred within the  
flash device. The user can select to transition the INT# output pin to the active (LOW) state when:  
• Transitioning from the Busy to the Ready state  
• 2-bit ECC error is detected  
• Transitioning from the Busy to the Ready state  
The interrupt sources are enabled by the Interrupt Configuration Register.  
Operation is controlled with the Interrupt Configuration Register where the INT# output (normally HIGH) is  
enabled. The Interrupt Configuration Register determines when an internal event is enabled to trigger a HIGH to  
LOW transition on the INT# output pin. The Interrupt Status Register indicates what enabled internal event(s)  
have occurred since the last time the Interrupt Status Register has been cleared. If enabled, the INT# output pin  
will then transition from HIGH to LOW upon the occurrence of an enabled event. Once the host recognizes that  
INT# has transitioned to the LOW state the Interrupt Status Register can be read to determine which internal  
event was responsible.  
The INT# output can be forced to transition back to the HIGH impedance state (returned HIGH by an external  
pull-up resistance) using three methods:  
• Disable the INT# output by loading ‘1’ into bit 15 of the Interrupt Configuration Register. The Interrupt Status  
Register will be cleared upon loading ICR[15] with ‘1.  
• Disabletheeventchannel responsiblefor causingthe outputtotransitionLowbyloading1intotheappropriate  
event enable bit in the Interrupt Configuration Register. The associated bit in the Interrupt Status Register will  
be cleared upon loading ‘1’ into the corresponding bit in the ICR.  
• Reset the appropriate bit (by writing ‘1’) in the Interrupt Status Register bit that indicates which internal event  
occurred to cause the output to go LOW. All Interrupt Status Register bits that are LOW and are also enabled in  
the Interrupt Configuration Register must be reset before the INT# output will return HIGH.  
The INT# output will also be returned to the default (disabled, HIGH-Z) state with a Hardware Reset  
(RESET# = LOW) or a power-on reset. Hardware reset and power-on reset disable all interrupts by setting the  
Interrupt Configuration Register back to the default (all interrupts disabled) state.  
Datasheet  
69  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded operations  
Table 33  
Interrupt Configuration Register  
POR RESET#  
Bits Function  
Type  
default default  
Description  
state  
state  
1 = INT# output disabled (HIGH or Open-Drain)  
0 = INT# output enabled, internal events will cause a HIGH  
to LOW transition  
INT#  
Output  
Enable  
[15]  
1
1
[14] Reserved  
[13:5] Reserved  
1
1
1
1
Reserved  
Reserved for Future Use  
1 = Ready/Busy transitions will not transition the INT#  
output  
0 = A Busy to Ready transition will cause a HIGH to LOW  
transition on the INT# output  
Reserved for future use  
Reserved for future use  
[4]  
READY  
1
1
Volatile,  
Read / Write  
[3] Reserved  
[2] Reserved  
1
1
1
1
1 = 2-bit error detection will not transition the INT# output  
0 = 2-bit error detection will cause a HIGH to LOW  
transition on the INT# output  
1 = 1-bit error detection will not transition the INT# output  
0 = 1-bit error detection will cause a HIGH to LOW  
transition on the INT# output  
2-bit Error  
[1]  
1
1
1
1
Detect  
1-bit Error  
Detect  
[0]  
Table 34  
Bits  
Interrupt Status Register  
POR RESET#  
default default  
Function  
Type  
Description  
Reserved for Future Use  
1 = A Busy to Ready transition has not occurred  
0 = A Busy to Ready transition has occurred  
Reserved for future use  
1 = POR has not occurred  
0 = POR has occurred  
state  
state  
1
[15:5]  
[4]  
Reserved  
READY  
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
3]  
Reserved  
Volatile,  
Read / Write  
POR  
Detect  
[2][65, 66]  
1 = 2-bit error detection has not occurred  
0 = 2-bit error detection has occurred  
1 = 1-bit error detection has not occurred  
0 = 1-bit error detection has occurred  
2-bit Error  
Detect  
[1]  
[0]  
1
1
1
1
1-bit Error  
Detect  
Notes  
62.Both POR and hardware reset results in all interrupt channels being disabled.  
63.Hardware reset results in all ISR bits being set to ‘1.  
64.POR results in the ISR POR Detect bit (ISR[2]) being cleared to ‘0, all other bits to be set to ‘1.  
65.ISR[2] is cleared (to ‘0’) during POR and is only set (to ‘1’) with a hardware reset (RESET# = 0) or with a write  
to the ISR.  
66.The INT# output state is not affected by the value of ISR[2].  
67.Writing to the ISR can only flip bits from the ‘0’ to the ‘1’ state. Only an interrupt occurrence flips an ISR bit  
from the ‘1’ to the ‘0’ state.  
Datasheet  
70  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI)  
ASO map  
7
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map  
7.1  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map — standard  
The device ID portion of the ASO (word locations 0h to 0Fh) provides manufacturer ID, device ID and basic feature  
set information for the device. For additional information, see “ID-CFI ASO” on page 51.  
Table 35  
Word address  
(SA) + 0000h  
ID (Autoselect) address map  
Data  
Description  
0001h  
007Eh  
Infineon Manufacturer ID  
Device ID  
(SA) + 0001h  
(SA) + 0002h  
(SA) + 0003h  
(SA) + 0004h  
(SA) + 0005h  
(SA) + 0006h  
(SA) + 0007h  
(SA) + 0008h  
(SA) + 0009h  
(SA) + 000Ah  
(SA) + 000Bh  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RFU  
Lower Software bits  
Bit 0 - Status Register support:  
1 = Status Register supported  
0 = Status Register not supported  
Bit 1 - DQ Polling support:  
1 = DQ Bits Polling supported  
0 = DQ Bits Polling not supported  
(SA) + 000Ch  
0005h  
Bit 3–2 - Command Set support:  
11 = Reserved  
10 = Reserved  
01 = HYPERFLASH™ Command Set  
00 = Classic Command Set  
Bits 4–F – Reserved = 0  
Upper Software bits  
(SA) + 000Dh  
(SA) + 000Eh  
(SA) + 000Fh  
Reserved  
0070h = 512 Mb @ 1.8 V  
006Fh = 512 Mb @ 3.0 V  
0072h = 256 Mb @ 1.8 V  
0071h = 256 Mb @ 3.0 V  
Device ID  
0074h = 128 Mb @ 1.8 V  
0073h = 128 Mb @ 3.0 V  
0000h  
Device ID  
Datasheet  
71  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI)  
ASO map  
Table 36  
CFI query identification string  
Word address  
Data  
Description  
(SA) + 0010h  
(SA) + 0011h  
(SA) + 0012h  
0051h  
0052h  
0059h  
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”  
(SA) + 0013h  
(SA) + 0014h  
0002h  
0000h  
Primary OEM Command Set  
(SA) + 0015h  
(SA) + 0016h  
0040h  
0000h  
Address for Primary Extended table  
Alternate OEM Command Set  
(00h = none exists)  
(SA) + 0017h  
(SA) + 0018h  
0000h  
0000h  
Address for alternate OEM Extended table  
(00h = none exists)  
(SA) + 0019h  
(SA) + 001Ah  
0000h  
0000h  
Table 37  
Word address  
(SA) + 001Bh  
CFI system interface string  
Data  
Description  
0017h for VCC = 1.8 V  
0027h for VCC = 3.0 V  
VCC Min. (erase / program) (D7–D4: volts, D3–D0: 100 millivolts)  
0019h for VCC = 1.8 V  
0036h for VCC = 3.0 V  
(SA) + 001Ch  
VCC Max. (erase / program) (D7–D4: volts, D3–D0: 100 millivolts)  
VPP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
(SA) + 001Dh  
(SA) + 001Eh  
(SA) + 001Fh  
0000h  
0000h  
0009h  
V
PP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
Typical timeout per single word write 2N µs  
Typical timeout for max  
multi-byte program, 2N µs  
(00h = Not supported)  
(SA) + 0020h  
(SA) + 0021h  
(SA) + 0022h  
0009h  
000Ah  
0012h (512 Mb)  
Typical timeout per individual block erase 2N ms  
0011h (256 Mb) Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = Not supported)  
0010h (128 Mb)  
(SA) + 0023h  
(SA) + 0024h  
(SA) + 0025h  
0002h  
0002h  
0002h  
Max. timeout for single word write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for buffer write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout per individual block erase 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical  
(00h = Not supported)  
(SA) + 0026h  
0002h  
Datasheet  
72  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI)  
ASO map  
Table 38  
CFI device geometry definition  
Word address  
Data  
Description  
001Ah (512 Mb)  
(SA) + 0027h  
0019h (256 Mb) Device Size = 2N byte  
0018h (128 Mb)  
(SA) + 0028h  
(SA) + 0029h  
(SA) + 002Ah  
(SA) + 002Bh  
0000h  
0000h  
0009h  
0000h  
Flash Device Interface Description 0 = ×8-only, 1 = ×16-only, 2 = ×8 /  
×16 capable  
Max. number of byte in multi-byte write = 2N  
(00 = Not supported)  
Number of Erase Block Regions within device  
1 = Uniform Device, 2 = Boot Device  
(SA) + 002Ch  
0001h  
(SA) + 002Dh  
(SA) + 002Eh  
(SA) + 002Fh  
(SA) + 0030h  
(SA) + 0031h  
(SA) + 0032h  
(SA) + 0033h  
(SA) + 0034h  
(SA) + 0035h  
(SA) + 0036h  
(SA) + 0037h  
(SA) + 0038h  
(SA) + 0039h  
(SA) + 003Ah  
(SA) + 003Bh  
(SA) + 003Ch  
Erase Block Region 1 information (refer to JEDEC JESD68-01 or  
JEP137 specifications)  
See description 00FFh, 0000h, 0000h, 0004h = 512 Mb (256 × 2-Mb blocks)  
007Fh, 0000h, 0000h, 0004h = 256 Mb (128 × 2-Mb blocks)  
003Fh, 0000h, 0000h, 0004h = 128 Mb (64 × 2-Mb blocks)  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 2 information (refer to JEDEC JESD68-01 or  
JEP137 specifications)  
Erase Block Region 3 information (refer to JEDEC JESD68-01 or  
JEP137 specifications)  
Erase Block Region 4 information (refer to JEDEC JESD68-01 or  
JEP137 specifications)  
Datasheet  
73  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI)  
ASO map  
Table 39  
Word address  
(SA) + 0040h  
CFI primary vendor-specific extended query  
Data  
0050h  
0052h  
0049h  
0031h  
0035h  
Description  
(SA) + 0041h  
(SA) + 0042h  
(SA) + 0043h  
(SA) + 0044h  
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”  
Major version number, ASCII  
Minor version number, ASCII  
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1–0)  
00b = Required, 01b = Not required  
Process Technology (Bits 5–2)  
0000b = 0.23 µm floating gate  
0001b = 0.17 µm floating gate  
0010b = 0.23 µm MIRRORBIT™  
0011b = 0.13 µm floating gate  
0100b = 0.11 µm MIRRORBIT™  
0101b = 0.09 µm floating gate  
0110b = 0.09 µm MIRRORBIT™  
0111b = 0.065 µm MIRRORBIT™ Eclipse  
1000b = 0.065 µm MIRRORBIT™  
1001b = 0.045 µm MIRRORBIT™  
Erase Suspend  
(SA) + 0045h  
001Ch  
0 = Not supported  
1 = Read only  
(SA) + 0046h  
0002h  
2 = Read and Write  
Sector Protect  
(SA) + 0047h  
(SA) + 0048h  
0001h  
0000h  
00 = Not supported  
X = Number of sectors in smallest group  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
00 = Not supported  
01 = Supported  
Sector Protect / Unprotect Scheme  
04 = High Voltage method  
05 = Software Command Locking method  
08 = Advanced Sector Protection method  
Simultaneous operation  
00 = Not supported  
X = Number of banks  
Burst Mode type  
00 = Not supported  
(SA) + 0049h  
0008h  
(SA) + 004Ah  
(SA) + 004Bh  
0000h  
0001h  
01 = Supported  
Datasheet  
74  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI)  
ASO map  
Table 39  
CFI primary vendor-specific extended query (Continued)  
Word address  
Data  
Description  
Page Read Mode type  
00 = Not supported  
(SA) + 004Ch  
0000h  
01 = 4 Word Page  
02 = 8 Word Page  
03 =16 Word Page  
ACC (Acceleration) supply minimum  
00 = Not supported  
D7–D4: Volt  
D3–D0: 100 mV  
ACC (Acceleration) supply maximum  
00 = Not supported  
(SA) + 004Dh  
(SA) + 004Eh  
0000h  
0000h  
D7–D4: Volt  
D3–D0: 100 mV  
WP# Protection  
00h = Flash device without WP Protect (No boot)  
01h = Eight 8-KB Sectors at top and bottom with WP (Dual boot)  
02h = Bottom Boot Device with WP Protect (Bottom boot)  
03h = Top Boot Device with WP Protect (Top boot)  
04h = Uniform, bottom WP Protect (Uniform bottom boot)  
05h = Uniform, top WP Protect (Uniform top boot)  
06h = WP Protect for all sectors  
07h = Uniform, top or bottom WP Protect  
Program Suspend  
(SA) + 004Fh  
(SA) + 0050h  
0000h  
0001h  
00 = Not supported  
01 = Supported  
Unlock Bypass  
(SA) +0051h  
(SA) + 0052h  
0000h  
000Ah  
00 = Not supported  
01 = Supported  
Secure silicon sector (Customer OTP Area = 1024B) Size 2N (bytes)  
Software features  
Bit 0: Status Register polling (1 = Supported, 0 = Not supported)  
Bit 1: DQ polling (1 = Supported, 0 = Not supported)  
Bit 2: New Program Suspend / Resume commands (1 = Supported, 0 = Not  
supported)  
Bit 3: Word Programming (1 = Supported, 0 = Not supported)  
Bit 4: Bit-Field Programming (1 = Supported, 0 = Not supported)  
Bit 5: Autodetect Programming (1 = Supported, 0 = Not supported)  
Bit 6: RFU  
(SA) + 0053h  
008Dh  
Bit 7: Multiple Writes per line (1 = Supported, 0 = Not supported)  
Page size = 2N bytes  
Erase Suspend Timeout maximum < 2N (µs)  
Program Suspend Timeout maximum < 2N (µs)  
(SA) + 0054h  
(SA) + 0055h  
(SA) + 0056h  
0005h  
0006h  
0006h  
Datasheet  
75  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI)  
ASO map  
Table 39  
Word address  
(SA) + 0057h to  
CFI primary vendor-specific extended query (Continued)  
Data  
Description  
FFFFh  
Reserved for Future Use  
(SA) + 0077h  
Embedded Hardware Reset Timeout maximum < 2N (µs)  
Reset with Reset Pin  
Non-Embedded Hardware Reset Timeout maximum < 2N (µs)  
Power-On Reset  
(SA) + 0078h  
0006h  
0009h  
(SA) + 0079h  
7.2  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO Map — automotive  
grade / AEC-Q100  
The CFI primary vendor-specific extended query for automotive grade / AEC-Q100 is extended to include  
Electronic Marking information for device traceability (see Table 40).  
Table 40  
Word address  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map[68]  
Number of  
bytes  
Data  
Example of actual Hex Read Out of  
Data field  
format  
of data  
example data  
Size of Electronic  
Marking  
Revision of  
Electronic Marking  
(SA) + 0080h  
(SA) + 0081h  
1
1
Hex  
Hex  
19  
0013h  
1
0001h  
004Ch, 0044h,  
0038h, 0037h,  
0032h, 0037h,  
0030h  
(SA) + 0082h  
Fab Lot #  
7
ASCII  
LD87270  
(SA) + 0089h  
(SA) + 008Ah  
(SA) + 008Bh  
Wafer #  
Die X coordinate  
Die Y coordinate  
1
1
1
Hex  
Hex  
Hex  
23  
10  
15  
0017h  
000Ah  
000Fh  
0042h, 0052h,  
0033h, 0033h,  
0031h, 0035h,  
0030h  
(SA) + 008Ch  
(SA) + 0093h  
Class Lot #  
7
ASCII  
NA  
BR33150  
NA  
Reserved for Future  
13  
Undefined  
Note  
68.Fab Lot # + Wafer # + Die X coordinate + Die Y coordinate provides unique ID for each device.  
Datasheet  
76  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
8
Software interface reference  
8.1  
Command summary  
Table 41  
Command definitions  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Addr  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Data  
RD  
F0  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
[72]  
Read  
Reset / ASO Exit  
1
1
2
1
3
4
RA  
[73, 82]  
XXX  
555  
555  
555  
555  
[84]  
Status Register Read  
70  
XXX  
RD  
Status Register Clear  
71  
Enter Deep Power-Down  
Program Power-On Reset Timer Register  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
XXX  
555  
B9  
34  
AA  
XXX  
PORTime  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
77  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Addr  
Second  
Third  
Addr  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Data  
AA  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
3C  
36  
Addr  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
Data  
RD  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
Read Power-On Reset Timer Register  
Load Interrupt Configuration Register  
Read Interrupt Configuration Register  
Load Interrupt Status Register  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
555  
555  
555  
555  
555  
555  
555  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
555  
555  
555  
555  
555  
555  
555  
PORTime  
ICR  
AA  
55  
RD  
AA  
55  
C4  
37  
ICR  
AA  
55  
ISR  
RD  
Read Interrupt Status Register  
AA  
55  
C5  
38  
ISR  
Load Volatile Configuration Register  
Read Volatile Configuration Register  
AA  
55  
VCR  
RD  
AA  
55  
C7  
VCR  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
78  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Addr  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Data  
AA  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr  
Data Addr Data  
Program Nonvolatile Configuration  
Register  
4
3
555  
555  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
555  
555  
39  
XXX  
NVCR  
Erase Nonvolatile Configuration Register  
Read Nonvolatile Configuration Register  
Word Program  
AA  
55  
C8  
RD  
NVCR  
PD  
4
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
555  
C6  
XXX  
4
6
1
3
6
6
555  
555  
SA  
AA  
AA  
29  
AA  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
A0  
25  
PA  
SA  
[86]  
Write to Buffer  
WC  
WBL  
PD  
WBL  
PD  
Program Buffer to Flash (confirm)  
[78]  
Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset  
555  
555  
555  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
F0  
80  
80  
Chip Erase  
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
10  
30  
[86]  
Sector Erase  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
79  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Second  
Addr Data  
Third  
Addr Data  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
(SA)  
555  
Blank Check  
1
1
33  
(SA)  
555  
Evaluate Erase Status  
D0  
[76, 77]  
Erase Suspend  
1
1
1
1
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
B0  
30  
51  
50  
[76, 77]  
Erase Resume  
[76, 77]  
Program Suspend  
[76, 77]  
Program Resume  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
80  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
(SA)  
555  
ID (Autoselect) Entry  
3
1
1
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
90  
(SA)  
555  
[75]  
CFI Enter  
98  
(SA)  
RA  
ID-CFI Read  
RD  
F0  
or  
FF  
[74, 82]  
Reset / ASO Exit  
1
XXX  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
81  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr  
Data Addr Data  
(SA)  
555  
SSR Entry  
3
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
88  
[73]  
Read  
1
4
6
RA  
555  
555  
RD  
AA  
AA  
Word Program  
Write to Buffer  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
A0  
25  
PA  
SA  
PD  
WC  
WBL  
PD  
WBL  
PD  
Program Buffer to Flash  
(confirm)  
1
SA  
29  
[78]  
Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset  
3
4
1
555  
555  
XXX  
AA  
AA  
F0  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
F0  
90  
[78]  
SSR Exit  
XX  
00h  
[74, 82]  
Reset / ASO Exit  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
82  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Addr  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Data  
AA  
Addr  
Data  
55  
Addr  
555  
Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
ASP Register Entry  
Program  
3
2
1
2
555  
XXX  
0
2AA  
XXX  
40  
A0  
PD  
[84]  
ASPR Read  
RD  
90  
[65, 66]  
ASPR ASO Exit  
XXX  
XXX  
0
[74, 82]  
Reset / ASO Exit  
1
XXX  
F0  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
83  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Second  
Addr Data  
Third  
Addr Data  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr  
Data Addr Data  
Password Protection command set definitions  
Password ASO Entry  
3
2
4
7
2
1
555  
XXX  
0
AA  
A0  
2AA  
55  
555  
60  
[80]  
Program  
PWAx PWDx  
Read  
PWD0  
25  
1
0
PWD1  
2
0
PWD2  
PWD0  
3
1
PWD3  
PWD1  
Unlock  
0
3
0
2
PWD2  
3
PWD3  
0
29  
[79, 82]  
Command Set Exit  
XXX  
XXX  
90  
XXX  
[74, 82]  
Reset / ASO Exit  
F0  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
84  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Addr Data  
Second  
Addr Data  
Third  
Addr Data  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
Non-volatile Sector Protection command set definitions  
PPB Entry  
3
2
2
1
2
2
1
555  
XXX  
XXX  
SA  
AA  
A0  
2AA  
SA  
0
55  
0
555  
C0  
[83]  
PPB Program  
[83]  
All PPB Erase  
80  
30  
[83, 84]  
PPB Read  
SA Protection Status  
RD (0)  
60  
[84, 85]  
[79, 82]  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
SA  
RD  
0
Command Set Exit  
90  
XXX  
[74, 82]  
Reset / ASO Exit  
F0  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
85  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Addr Data  
Second  
Addr Data  
Third  
Addr Data  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
Global Non-volatile Sector Protection Freeze command set definitions  
PPB Lock Entry  
3
2
555  
XXX  
AA  
A0  
2AA  
XXX  
55  
0
555  
50  
PPB Lock Bit Clear  
RD  
(0)  
[84]  
PPB Lock Status Read  
1
XXX  
[79, 82]  
Command Set Exit  
2
1
XXX  
XXX  
90  
F0  
XXX  
0
[82]  
Reset / ASO Exit  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
86  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Second  
Addr Data  
Third  
Addr Data  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
Volatile Sector Protection command set definitions  
DYB ASO Entry  
3
2
2
1
2
2
1
555  
XXX  
XXX  
SA  
AA  
A0  
2AA  
SA  
55  
0
555  
E0  
[83]  
DYB Set  
[83]  
DYB Clear  
A0  
SA  
1
[84]  
DYB Status Read  
RD (0)  
60  
[83, 84, 85]  
SA Protection Status  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
SA  
RD  
0
[79, 82]  
Command Set Exit  
90  
XXX  
[82]  
Reset / ASO Exit  
F0  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
87  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Second  
Addr Data  
ECC command set definitions  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Addr  
Data  
Addr Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
ECC Status Enter  
3
1
2
2
2
1
1
555  
RA  
AA  
RD  
60  
60  
60  
50  
F0  
2AA  
55  
555  
75  
[84]  
ECC Status Read  
Error Lower Address Register  
Error Upper Address Register  
Read Error Detection Counter  
Clear ECC Errors  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
XXX  
XX1  
XX2  
XX3  
RD  
RD  
RD  
Reset/ASO Exit  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
88  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 41  
Command definitions (Continued)  
[69, 70, 71, 72]  
Bus cycles  
Addr  
Command sequence  
Cycles  
First  
Second  
Addr Data  
CRC command set definitions  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Addr  
Data  
Addr Data  
Data  
Addr Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
CRC ASO Entry  
3
1
555  
BL  
AA  
C3  
2AA  
55  
555  
78  
Load CRC Start Address  
Load CRC End Address (start  
calculation)  
1
EL  
3C  
CRC Suspend  
1
1
1
XXX  
RA  
C0  
RD  
C1  
Array Read (during suspend)  
CRC Resume  
XXX  
Read Check-value Low Result  
Register  
2
XXX  
60  
XX0  
XX1  
RD  
RD  
Read Check-value High Result  
Register  
2
1
XXX  
XXX  
60  
F0  
Reset / ASO Exit  
Notes  
69.All values are in hexadecimal. All addresses reference 16-bit words.  
70.Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle during Read, ID/CFI Read (Manufacturing  
ID / Device ID), Indicator Bits, Secure Silicon Region Read, SSR Lock Read, and 2nd cycle of Status Register  
Read.  
71.Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are ‘don’t care’ in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WC and PWD.  
72.Address bits AMAX–A11 are ‘don’t care’ for unlock and command cycles, unless SA or PA required. (AMAX is the  
highest address pin.)  
73.No unlock or command cycles required when reading array data.  
74.The Reset command is required to return to reading array data when device is in the ID-CFI (Autoselect)  
Mode, or if DQ5 goes HIGH (while the device is providing status data).  
75.Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in ID-CFI (Autoselect) Mode.  
76.The system can read and program / program suspend in non-erasing sectors, or enter the ID-CFI ASO, when  
in the Erase Suspend Mode. The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
77.The Erase Resume / Program Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend / Program Suspend  
Modes.  
78.Issue this command sequence to return to READ Mode after detecting device is in a Write-to-Buffer-Abort  
state. Note that the full command sequence is required if resetting out of ABORT.  
79.The Exit command returns the device to reading the array.  
80.For PWDx, only one portion of the password can be programmed per each ‘A0’ command. Portions of the  
password must be programmed in sequential order (PWD0–PWD3).  
81.All ASP Register bits are one-time programmable. The program state = 0 and the erase state = 1. Both the  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit and the Password Protection Mode Lock Bit cannot be programmed at  
the same time or the ASPR Register Bits Program operation aborts and returns the device to Read Mode.  
ASPR Register bits that are reserved for future use are undefined and may be 0’s or 1’s.  
82.If any of the Entry commands was issued, an Exit command must be issued to reset the device into Read  
Mode.  
83.Bit 0 = 0 indicates the Protected State, Bit 0 = 1 indicates the Unprotected State. Bits 1 through 15 are all 1s.  
The sector address for DYB set, DYB clear, or PPB Program command may be any location within the sector;  
the lower order bits of the sector address are ‘don’t care.  
84.Data out during a Status Register Read transaction, DYB Read, PPB Read, SA Protection Read, Password  
Read, POR Timer Read, ICR Read, ISR Read, VCR Read, NVCR Read, FIDR Read, ASPR Read, PPBL Read  
Register Read transactions is only valid during the first word output by the device. Subsequent data values  
output if CK/CK# continue to toggle while CS# remains LOW are undefined.  
85.Data out during a SA Protection Status Read indicates whether the indicated sector is protected in bits 0–2.  
Bit 0 – Indicates whether the indicated sector is protected (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 1 – Protected using the sector’s DYB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bit 2 – Protected using the sector’s PPB bit (0 = protected, 1 = unprotected).  
Bits 3 through 15 are all 1s.  
86.The smaller parameter-sectors need to include A[16:11] as part of the address identifying the target  
parameter-sector during erase and program command sequences.  
87.Both the ID (Autoselect) Entry and the CFI Entry allows access to the same ID/CFI data set. All data contained  
in within the ID/CFI data set is available after using either the ID or CFI Entry sequences.  
Datasheet  
89  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Software interface reference  
Command Definitions Legend:  
X = Don’t care.  
RA = Address of the memory to be read.  
RD = Data read from location RA during read operation.  
PA = Address of the memory location to be programmed.  
PD = Data to be programmed at location PA.  
SA = Address of the sector selected. Address bits AMAX–A17 for 256-KB sectors and AMAX–A11 for 4-KB parameter sectors  
uniquely select any sector.  
WBL = Write Buffer Location. The address must be within the same Line.  
WC = Word Count is the number of write buffer locations to load minus 1.  
PWAx = Password address for word0 = 00h, word1 = 01h, word2 = 02h, and word3 = 03h.  
PWDx = Password data word0, word1, word2, and word3.  
Datasheet  
90  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Data integrity  
9
Data integrity  
9.1  
Endurance  
Table 42  
Program / erase endurance  
Non-volatile unit  
Temperature range  
Industrial  
Minimum  
100K  
100K  
10K  
Unit  
Any sector  
Industrial Plus  
Extended  
Industrial  
Industrial Plus  
Extended  
Program-Erase cycles  
100K  
100K  
10K  
Configuration Register  
9.2  
Data retention  
Table 43  
Data retention  
Parameter  
Typical Unit  
Data retention time after 1K cycles or less with one programming operation, per half-page,  
per erase  
20  
Years  
Note  
88.Cycling data collection was limited to 100K cycles.  
Datasheet  
91  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Hardware interface  
10  
Hardware interface  
For the general description of the HYPERBUS™ hardware interface of HYPERFLASH™ memories refer to the  
HYPERBUS™ Specification. The following section describes HYPERFLASH™ device dependent aspects of  
hardware interface.  
Datasheet  
92  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11  
Electrical specifications  
The following section describes HYPERFLASH™ device dependent aspects of electrical specifications.  
11.1  
Absolute maximum ratings  
Table 44  
Absolute maximum ratings  
Storage temperature plastic packages  
Ambient temperature with power applied  
Voltage with respect to ground  
All signals[89]  
Output short circuit current[90]  
VCC  
–65°C to +150°C  
–65°C to +125°C  
–0.5 V to +(VCC + 0.5 V)  
100 mA  
–0.5 V to +4.0 V  
11.1.1  
Input signal overshoot  
During DC conditions, input or I/O signals should remain equal to or between VSS and VDD. During voltage  
transitions, inputs or I/Os may negative overshoot VSS to –1.0 V or positive overshoot to VDD + 1.0 V, for periods  
up to 20 ns.  
VSSQ to VCC  
Q
- 1.0V  
20 ns  
Figure 21  
Maximum negative overshoot waveform  
20 ns  
VCCQ + 1.0V  
VSSQ to VCC  
Q
Figure 22  
Notes  
Maximum positive overshoot waveform  
89.Minimum DC voltage on input or I/O signal is –1.0 V. During voltage transitions, input or I/O signals may  
undershoot VSS to –1.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 21. Maximum DC voltage on input or I/O signals  
is VCC + 1.0 V. During voltage transitions, input or I/O signals may overshoot to VCC + 1.0 V for periods up to  
20 ns. See Figure 22.  
90.No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a time. Duration of the short circuit should not be  
greater than one second.  
91.Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the  
device. This is a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above  
those indicated in the operational sections of this data sheet is not implied. Exposure of the device to  
absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
Datasheet  
93  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11.2  
Thermal resistance  
Table 45  
Thermal resistance  
Description  
Parameter  
Test condition  
Device  
VAA024 Unit  
38.5  
43.4  
45.3  
°C/W  
38  
43  
45.3  
10.2  
15.8  
17.4  
°C/W  
10.2  
15.8  
17.4  
11.6  
16.3  
18.1  
°C/W  
11.6  
Test conditions follow standard  
test methods and procedures for  
measuring thermal impedance in  
accordance with EIA/JESD51, with  
Still Air (0 m/s).  
S26KS512S  
S26KS256S  
S26KS128S  
S26KL512S  
S26KL256S  
S26KL128S  
S26KS512S  
S26KS256S  
S26KS128S  
S26KL512S  
S26KL256S  
S26KL128S  
S26KS512S  
S26KS256S  
S26KS128S  
S26KL512S  
S26KL256S  
S26KL128S  
Thermal resistance  
Theta JA  
Theta JB  
Theta JC  
(Junction to ambient)  
Thermal resistance  
(Junction to board)  
Thermal resistance  
(Junction to case)  
16.3  
18.1  
11.3  
Latchup characteristics  
Table 46  
Latchup specification  
Description  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
V
V
Input voltage with respect to VSSQ on all input only connections  
Input voltage with respect to VSSQ on all I/O connections  
–1.0  
–1.0  
–100  
VCCQ + 1.0  
VCCQ + 1.0  
+100  
VCCQ Current  
mA  
Notes  
92.Test conditions follow standard methods and procedures for measuring thermal impedance in accordance  
with EIA/JESD51.  
93.Excludes power supplies VCC/VCCQ. Test conditions: VCC = VCCQ = 1.8 V, one connection at a time tested,  
connections not being tested are at VSS  
.
Datasheet  
94  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11.4  
Operating ranges  
Operating ranges define those limits between which the functionality of a device is guaranteed. The operating  
range is device specific. Consult the device data sheet ordering part number valid combinations to know which  
operating ranges are supported by a particular device.  
11.4.1  
Temperature ranges  
Table 47  
Temperature ranges  
Spec  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Device  
Unit  
Min  
–40  
–40  
–40  
–40  
–40  
–40  
Max  
+85  
+105  
+125  
+85  
Industrial  
Industrial Plus  
Extended  
°C  
°C  
°C  
°C  
°C  
°C  
Ambient Temperature TA  
Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 3  
Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 2  
Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 1  
+105  
+125  
11.4.2  
Power supply voltages  
V
CC and VCC  
Q
Q
1.7 V to 1.95 V  
2.7 V to 3.6 V  
VCC and VCC  
Datasheet  
95  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11.5  
DC characteristics (CMOS compatible)  
Table 48  
DC characteristics (CMOS compatible)  
Parameter  
Description  
Test conditions  
Min  
Typ[102]  
Max  
Unit  
CS# = VIL, @ 166 MHz,  
VCC = 1.95 V  
CS# = VIL, @ 100 MHz,  
VCC = 3.6 V  
CS# = VIL, @ 166 MHz,  
VCCQ = 1.95 V,  
CLOAD = 20 pF  
130  
180  
mA  
VCC active read current (core  
current only, IO switching  
current is not included)  
ICC1  
80  
80  
100  
100  
mA  
mA  
VCCQ active read current of  
IOs  
IIO1  
CS# = VIL, @ 100 MHz,  
VCCQ = 3.6 V,  
CLOAD = 20 pF  
80  
100  
mA  
VCC active program  
current[94, 95]  
ICC3P  
ICC3E  
V
CC = VCC max  
60  
60  
100  
100  
mA  
mA  
VCC active erase  
VCC = VCC max  
CS# = VIH,  
RESET# = VCC  
VCC = VCC max  
current[94, 95]  
VCC standby current for  
Industrial Temperature  
(–40°C to +85°C)  
ICC4I  
,
25  
25  
100  
300  
µA  
µA  
VCC standby current for  
Industrial Plus  
CS# = VIH,  
ICC4IC  
(Automotive - In Cabin)  
Temperature  
RESET# = VCC,  
VCC = VCC max  
(–40°C to +105°C)  
VCC standby current for  
Extended Temperature  
(–40°C to +125°C)  
CS# = VIH,  
ICC4E  
RESET# = VCC  
,
25  
10  
300  
20  
µA  
VCC = VCC max  
CS# = VIH,  
ICC5  
VCC reset current[98]  
RESET# = VSS  
,
mA  
VCC = VCC max  
Notes  
94.ICC active while embedded algorithm is in progress.  
95.Not 100% tested.  
96.Active Clock Stop Mode enables the lower power mode when the CK/CK# signals remain stable for  
tACC + 30 ns.  
97.VCCQ = 1.70 V to 1.95 V or 2.7 V to 3.6 V.  
98.VCC = VCCQ = 1.8 V or VCC = VCCQ = 3.0 V.  
99.During power-up there are spikes of current demand, the system needs to be able to supply this current to  
insure the part initializes correctly.  
100.If an embedded operation is in progress at the start of reset, the current consumption will remain at the  
embedded operation specification until the embedded operation is stopped by the reset. If no embedded  
operation is in progress when reset is started, or following the stopping of an embedded operation, ICC7  
will be drawn during the remainder of tRPH. After the end of tRPH the device will go to Standby Mode until  
the next read or write.  
101.The recommended pull-up resistor for the INT# and RSTO# outputs is 5k to 10k Ohms.  
102.Typical ICC values are measured at tAI = 25°C and VCC = VCCQ = 1.8 V or 3.0 V (not applicable to IDPD for  
85°C, 105°C, and 125°C).  
Datasheet  
96  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
Table 48  
DC characteristics (CMOS compatible) (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Test conditions  
Min  
Typ[102]  
Max  
Unit  
VIH = VCC, VIL = VSS  
,
6
12  
mA  
VCC = 1.95 V  
ICC6  
Active clock stop mode[96]  
VIH = VCC, VIL = VSS  
VCC = 3.6 V  
,
6
80  
8
12  
100  
18  
mA  
mA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
VCC current during  
power-up[97]  
Deep power-down current  
512 Mb @ 25°C  
Deep power-down current  
512 Mb @ 85°C  
Deep power-down current  
512 Mb @ 105°C  
Deep power-down current  
512 Mb @ 125°C  
Deep power-down current CS# = VIH, RESET#,  
(all other densities) @ 25°C VCC = VCC max  
Deep power-down current  
(all other densities) @ 85°C  
Deep power-down current  
(all other densities) @ 105°C  
CS# = X,  
ICC7  
VCC = VCC max  
30  
95  
150  
3
50  
150  
250  
6
IDPD  
4
10  
5
15  
Deep power-down current  
256 Mb @ 125°C  
Deep power-down current  
128 Mb @ 125°C  
15  
10  
25  
15  
VIL  
VIH  
Input low voltage  
Input high voltage  
–0.15 × VCC  
0.65 × VCCQ  
Q
0.35 × VCC  
1.15 × VCC  
Q
Q
V
V
IOH = 100 µA for  
VOH  
Output high voltage  
VCCQ – 0.20  
V
DQ[7:0]  
IOL = 100 µA for  
DQ7–DQ0  
VOL  
Output low voltage  
0.15 × VCC  
Q
V
IOL = 2 mA for INT#  
and RSTO#  
Notes  
94.ICC active while embedded algorithm is in progress.  
95.Not 100% tested.  
96.Active Clock Stop Mode enables the lower power mode when the CK/CK# signals remain stable for  
tACC + 30 ns.  
97.VCCQ = 1.70 V to 1.95 V or 2.7 V to 3.6 V.  
98.VCC = VCCQ = 1.8 V or VCC = VCCQ = 3.0 V.  
99.During power-up there are spikes of current demand, the system needs to be able to supply this current to  
insure the part initializes correctly.  
100.If an embedded operation is in progress at the start of reset, the current consumption will remain at the  
embedded operation specification until the embedded operation is stopped by the reset. If no embedded  
operation is in progress when reset is started, or following the stopping of an embedded operation, ICC7  
will be drawn during the remainder of tRPH. After the end of tRPH the device will go to Standby Mode until  
the next read or write.  
101.The recommended pull-up resistor for the INT# and RSTO# outputs is 5k to 10k Ohms.  
102.Typical ICC values are measured at tAI = 25°C and VCC = VCCQ = 1.8 V or 3.0 V (not applicable to IDPD for  
85°C, 105°C, and 125°C).  
Datasheet  
97  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11.5.1  
Capacitance characteristics  
Table 49  
1.8 V capacitive characteristics  
Description  
Parameter  
CI  
CID  
CO  
CIO  
CIOD  
COP  
CIP  
Min  
3.5  
5.0  
5.0  
Max  
4.5  
0.25  
6.0  
6.0  
0.8  
Unit  
pF  
pF  
pF  
pF  
pF  
Input capacitance (CK, CK#, CS#, PSC, PSC#)  
Delta input capacitance (CK, CK#, CS#, PSC, PSC#)  
Output capacitance (RWDS)  
I/O pin capacitance (DQx)  
I/O pin capacitance delta (DQx)  
INT#, RSTO# pin capacitance  
5.0  
6.5  
6.0  
9.0  
pF  
pF  
RESET# pin capacitance  
Table 50  
3.0 V capacitive characteristics  
Description  
Parameter  
CI  
CI  
CO  
CIO  
CIOD  
COP  
CIP  
Min  
3.5  
3.5  
4.5  
4.5  
Max  
4.5  
4.5  
6.0  
6.0  
0.8  
6.0  
8.5  
Unit  
pF  
pF  
pF  
pF  
pF  
Input capacitance (CK, CS#)  
PSC  
Output capacitance (RWDS)  
I/O pin capacitance (DQx)  
I/O pin capacitance delta (DQx)  
INT#, RSTO# pin capacitance  
RESET# pin capacitance  
5.0  
6.0  
pF  
pF  
Notes  
103.These values are guaranteed by design and are tested on a sample basis only.  
104.Pin capacitance is measured according to JEP147 procedure for measuring capacitance using a vector  
network analyzer. VCC, VCCQ are applied and all other pins (except the pin under test) floating. DQs should  
be in the high impedance state.  
105.The capacitance values for the CK, CK#, RWDS and DQx pins must have similar capacitance values to allow  
for signal propagation time matching in the system. The capacitance value for CS# is not as critical because  
there are no critical timings between CS# going active (LOW) and data being presented on the DQs bus.  
106.These values are guaranteed by design and are tested on a sample basis only.  
107.Pin capacitance is measured according to JEP147 procedure for measuring capacitance using a vector  
network analyzer. VCC, VCCQ are applied and all other pins (except the pin under test) floating. DQs should  
be in the high impedance state.  
108.The capacitance values for the CK, RWDS and DQx pins must have similar capacitance values to allow for  
signal propagation time matching in the system. The capacitance value for CS# is not as critical because  
there are no critical timings between CS# going active (LOW) and data being presented on the DQs bus.  
Datasheet  
98  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11.6  
Power-up and power-down  
The memory is considered to be powered-off when the core power supply (VCC) drops below the VCC lock-out  
voltage (VLKO). When VCC is below VLKO, the entire memory array is protected against a program or erase  
operation. This ensures that no spurious alteration of the memory content can occur during power transition.  
During a power supply transition down to the VSS level, VCCQ should remain less than or equal to VCC  
.
If VCC goes below VCC reset (VRST) then returns above VRST to VCC minimum, the power-on reset interface state is  
entered and the EAC starts the cold reset embedded algorithm.  
VCC must always be greater than or equal to VCCQ (VCC VCCQ).  
The device ignores all inputs until a time delay of tVCS has elapsed after the moment that VCC and VCCQ both rise  
above, and stay above, the minimum VCC thresholds. During tVCS the device is performing power-on reset  
operations.  
During power-down or voltage drops below VLKO, the VCC voltages must drop below VRST for a period of tPD for  
the part to initialize correctly when VCC and VCCQ again rise to their operating ranges. See Figure 23. If during a  
voltage drop the VCC stays above VLKO the part will stay initialized and will work correctly when VCC is again above  
VCC minimum. If the part locks up from improper initialization, a software reset can be used to initialize the part  
correctly.  
Normal precautions must be taken for supply decoupling to stabilize the VCC and VCCQ power supplies. Each  
device in a system should have the VCC and VCCQ power supplies decoupled by a suitable capacitor close to the  
package connections (this capacitor is generally on the order of 0.1 µF).  
VCC (Max)  
VCC  
No Device Access Allowed  
VCC (Min)  
Device Access  
Allowed  
tVCS  
VLKO  
VRST  
tPD  
Time  
Figure 23  
Power-down or voltage drop  
Datasheet  
99  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
Table 51  
Symbol  
VCC  
VLKO  
VRST  
1.8 V power-up / power-down voltage and timing  
Parameter  
VCC power supply  
VCC cut-off below which re-initialization is required  
VCC low voltage needed to ensure initialization will occur  
Min  
1.7  
1.5  
0.5  
Max  
1.95  
Unit  
V
V
V
VCC and VCCQ minimum to first access  
RESET# LOW to HIGH transition to first access  
(VCC and VCCQ minimum)  
tVCS  
tPD  
300  
µs  
µs  
Duration of VCC VRST  
10  
Table 52  
3.0 V power-up / power-down voltage and timing  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
2.7  
2.4  
0.7  
Max  
3.6  
Unit  
VCC  
VLKO  
VRST  
VCC power supply  
VCC cut-off below which re-initialization is required  
VCC low voltage needed to ensure initialization will occur  
V
V
V
VCC and VCCQ minimum to first access  
RESET# LOW to HIGH transition to first access  
(VCC and VCCQ minimum)  
tVCS  
tPD  
300  
µs  
µs  
Duration of VCC VRST  
10  
Note  
109.VCC ramp rate can be non-linear.  
Datasheet  
100  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11.6.1  
Power-on (Cold) Reset (POR)  
When power is first applied, with supply voltage below VLKO then rising to reach operating range minimum,  
internal device configuration and cold reset activities are initiated. RESET# and CS# are ignored during the  
duration of the POR operation (tVCS) and any user extended period of RSTO# LOW. Command sequences are  
blocked while the device is in the POR state or RSTO# is LOW. During this period, the device can not be selected,  
will not accept commands, and does not drive outputs other than RSTO#. RESET# LOW during this POR period is  
optional. If RESET# is driven LOW during POR it must satisfy the hardware reset parameters tRP and tRPH in which  
case the POR operations will be completed at the end of tVCS and tRPH. If RESET# is LOW during tVCS it may remain  
LOW at the end of tVCS to hold the device in the hardware reset state. If RESET# is HIGH at the end of tVCS the device  
will go to the Standby state. CS# must go to VIH before the end of RSTO# LOW.  
During cold reset, the device will draw ICC7 current. If CS# is LOW during tVCS the device may draw higher than  
typical POR current during tVCS but will not exceed the maximum, and the level of CS# will not affect the cold reset  
EA.  
If POR has not been properly completed by the end of tVCS, a later transition to the hardware reset state will cause  
a transition to the power-on reset interface state and initiate the cold reset embedded algorithm. This ensures  
the device can complete a cold reset even if some aspect of the system power-on voltage ramp-up causes the  
POR to not initiate or complete correctly.  
RSTO# is an open-drain output used to indicate when a POR is occurring within the device and can be used as a  
system level reset signal. Upon completion of the internal POR the RSTO# signal will transition from LOW to HIGH  
impedance after a user defined timeout period has elapsed. Upon transition to the HIGH impedance state the  
external pull-up resistance will pull RSTO# HIGH and the device immediately is placed into the Standby state.  
While RSTO# is LOW, no commands are accepted by the device.  
If the user wants to extend the RSTO# period beyond the POR (tVCS) period, the nonvolatile PORTime Register  
must be programmed. The default value for this register (FFFFh), provides zero added time. The RSTO# signal will  
return to HIGH impedance at the end of tVCS. A value programmed into the 16-bit PORTime Register is multiplied  
by tPOR_CK (see Table 53) to define the length of extension to the RSTO# pulse beyond tVCS. The length of the  
programmed extension to the RSTO# assertion is the value programmed into the PORTime Register plus one  
clock cycle. The PORTime Register is OTP and, once programmed, will fail subsequent programming attempts.  
Table 53  
User POR extension clock timings  
Parameter  
Symbol  
tPOR_CK  
Min  
25  
Max  
42  
Unit  
µs  
POR extension clock period  
Note that both the RSTO# and INT# outputs are undefined while VCC is below VCC(min). By the time that VCC(min)  
is reached, the INT# output will be in the high impedance state. The RSTO# output will transition from the LOW  
to high impedance state after tVCS, plus any additional user defined POR extension time, after VCC(min) has been  
reached.  
Datasheet  
101  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
Vcc_VccQ  
Initialization  
RSTO#  
VCC Minimum  
tVCS  
Internal POR  
Initialization Process Active  
t POR_CK  
Device Access Allowed  
tCSHI  
CS#  
tRPH  
tRP  
tRH  
RESET#  
RESET#  
Reset Low during tVCS option  
tRH  
Reset High during tVCS option  
Figure 24  
Power-on reset signal diagram[110, 111, 112]  
11.6.2  
Hardware Reset  
• Terminates any operation in progress  
• DQ[7:0] are placed into the High-Z state when RESET# is LOW  
• Exits any ASO  
• Tristates all outputs  
• Resets the Status Register  
• Resets the EAC to Standby state  
• CS# is ignored for the duration of the reset operation (tRPH  
)
• To meet the reset current specification (ICC5), CS# must be held HIGH  
To ensure data integrity, any nonvolatile operation that was interrupted should be reinitiated once the device  
completes the hardware reset process.  
Notes  
110.VCCQ must be the same voltage as VCC  
.
111.PORTime is a customer programmed configuration register intended to allow RSTO# assertion beyond tVCS  
.
PORTime is described in Table 14.  
112.tPOR_CK is the internal (on-chip) clock period used to generate the extension to RSTO#. tPOR_CK is described  
in Table 53.  
Datasheet  
102  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11.6.3  
Hardware (Warm) Reset  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the device to the Standby state. While RESET# is LOW,  
command sequences and read operations are not allowed. Command sequences are blocked while the device is  
in the reset state.  
During Hardware Reset, the device will draw ICC5 current. When RESET# continues to be held at VSS, the device  
draws CMOS standby current (ICC4). If RESET# is held at VIL, but not at VSS, the standby current is greater.  
A Hardware Reset will cause the bus configuration to be defined by the Non-volatile Configuration Register  
(NVCR). See Figure 25.  
After the device has completed POR and entered the Standby state, any later transition to the Hardware Reset  
state will initiate the warm reset embedded algorithm. A warm reset is much shorter than a cold reset, taking tens  
of µs (tRPH) to complete. During the warm reset EA, any in progress EA is stopped and the EAC is returned to its  
POR state without reloading EAC algorithms from non-volatile memory. After the warm reset EA is completed,  
the interface will remain in the Hardware Reset state if RESET# remains LOW. When RESET# returns HIGH, the  
interface will transition to the Standby state. If RESET# is HIGH at the end of the warm reset EA, the interface will  
directly transition to the Standby state.  
If POR has not been properly completed by the end of tVCS, a later transition to the Hardware Reset state will cause  
a transition to the Power-On Reset interface state and initiate the cold reset EA. This ensures the device can  
complete a Cold Reset even if some aspect of the system Power-On voltage ramp-up causes the POR to not  
initiate or complete correctly.  
tRP  
RESET#  
tRH  
tRPH  
CS#  
Figure 25  
Hardware reset timing diagram  
Table 54  
Parameter  
tVCS  
tRPH  
tRP  
tRH  
tPD  
tCSHI  
Power-on and reset parameters  
Description  
Limit  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Time  
300  
30  
200  
150  
10  
Unit  
µs  
µs  
ns  
ns  
VCC setup time to first access[113]  
RESET# LOW to CS# LOW  
RESET# pulse width  
Time between RESET# (HIGH) and CS# (LOW)  
Duration of VCC VRST  
µs  
ns  
Chip Select HIGH between operations  
6.0  
Hardware Reset can also be used to exit from DPD mode. Driving the RESET# input LOW (for the minimum tRP  
time) will also cause the device to exit the DPD Mode. The device will take tDPDOUT to return to the Standby state.  
Upon exit from DPD, the device will have the same default settings that exist after POR. See “Deep power-down”  
on page 104.  
Notes  
113.Bus transactions (read and write) are not allowed during the power-up reset time (tVCS).  
114.Timing measured from VCC reaching VCC min to VIH on Reset and VIL on CS#.  
115.RESET# LOW is optional during POR. If RESET is asserted during POR, the later of tRPH and tVCS will determine  
when CS# may go LOW. If RESET# remains LOW after tVCS is satisfied, tRPH is measured from the end of tVCS  
.
RESET must also be HIGH tRH before CS# goes LOW.  
116.VCC ramp rate can be non-linear.  
117.Sum of tRP + tRH must be equal to or greater than tRPH  
.
Datasheet  
103  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
11.7  
Power-off with Hardware Data Protection  
The memory is considered to be powered off when the core power supply (VCC) drops below the lock-out voltage  
(VLKO). When VCC is below VLKO, the entire memory array is protected against a program or erase operation. This  
ensures that no spurious alteration of the memory content can occur during power transition. During a power  
supply transition down to power-off, VCCQ should remain less than or equal to VCC  
.
If VCC goes below VRST (Min), then returns above VRST (Min) to VCC minimum, the Power-On Reset interface state  
is entered and the EAC starts the cold reset EA.  
11.8  
Power Conservation modes  
Deep power-down  
11.8.1  
In the DPD mode, current consumption is driven to the lowest level. The DPD Mode must be entered while the  
device is in the Standby state while not in an ASO. DPD is entered using the DPD Entry command sequence (See  
Table 41). During the tDPDIN period the device will ignore command sequences (read and write transactions will  
not be processed).  
Exiting the DPD Mode is accomplished with the assertion of DPD Entry command sequence. During the tDPDOUT  
period the device will ignore command sequences (read and write transactions will not be processed) and RWDS  
will not toggle during an attempted read transaction.  
During the tDPDIN period, the device will ignore CS#. Entering DPD mode is not interrupted or aborted by a  
command sequence. Exiting DPD mode must be done after satisfying tDPDIN  
.
Driving the RESET# input LOW (for the minimum tRP time) will also cause the device to exit the DPD Mode. The  
device will take tDPDOUT to return to the Standby state. Entering DPD mode is aborted by driving the RESET# input  
LOW (for the minimum tRP time) during tDPDIN  
.
Upon exit from DPD mode, the device will have the same default settings that exist after POR.  
Table 55  
Symbol  
tDPDIN  
DPD mode entry and exit timing  
Parameter  
Deep Power-Down CR[15] = 0 register write to DPD power level  
Deep Power-Down to Standby wakeup time  
Min  
10  
Max  
300  
Unit  
µs  
µs  
tDPDOUT  
CS#  
CK, CK#  
DQ[7:0]  
tDPDIN  
Phase  
Write Command-Address  
CR Value  
Enter DPD Mode  
DPD mode  
Figure 26  
Deep power down entry timing  
tDPDCSL  
CS#  
CK, CK#  
DQ[7:0]  
tDPDOUT  
Phase  
Exit DPD Mode  
Standby  
New Transaction  
DPD mode  
Dummy Transaction to Exit DPD  
Figure 27  
Deep power down CS# exit timing  
Datasheet  
104  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Electrical specifications  
tRP  
RESET#  
tDPDOUT  
Phase  
Reset to Exit DPD  
Exit DPD  
Standby  
Figure 28  
Deep power down RESET# exit timing  
11.8.2  
Active clock stop  
The active clock stop state reduces device interface energy consumption to the ICC6 level during the data transfer  
portion of a read or write operation. The device automatically enables this state when clock remains stable for  
tACC + 30 ns. While in Active Clock Stop state, read data is latched and always driven onto the data bus. ICC6 shown  
in “DC characteristics (CMOS compatible)” on page 96.  
Active clock stop state helps reduce current consumption when the host system clock has stopped to pause the  
data transfer. Even though CS# may be LOW throughout these extended data transfer cycles, the memory device  
host interface will go into the Active Clock Stop current level at tACC + 30 ns. This allows the device to transition  
into a lower current state if the data transfer is stalled. Active read or write current will resume once the data  
transfer is restarted with a toggling clock. Clock can be stopped during any portion of the active transaction as  
long as it is in the LOW state. Note that it is recommended to avoid stopping the clock during register access.  
CS#  
Clock Stopped  
CK#, CK  
Latency Count (1X)  
High: 2X Latency Count  
Low: 1X Latency Count  
RWDS  
RWDS & Data are edge aligned  
CMD  
[7:0]  
CMD  
[7:0]  
ADR  
[31:24]  
ADR  
[23:16]  
ADR  
[15:8]  
ADR  
[7:0]  
DoutA  
[7:0]  
DoutB  
[7:0]  
DoutA+1  
[7:0]  
DoutB+1  
[7:0]  
DQ[7:0]  
Output Driven  
Read Data  
Command - Address  
(Host drives DQ[7:0] and Memory drives RWDS)  
Figure 29  
Active clock stop during Read transaction[118]  
Note  
118.CS is LOW during the CA cycles. In this Read Transaction there is a single initial latency count for read data  
access because, this read transaction does not begin at a time when additional latency is required by the  
slave.  
Datasheet  
105  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Timing specifications  
12  
Timing specifications  
The following section describes HYPERFLASH™ device dependent aspects of timing specifications.  
12.1  
AC test conditions  
Device  
Under  
Test  
CL  
Figure 30  
Table 56  
Test setup  
Test specification[119]  
Parameter  
All speeds  
20  
2.0  
0.0–VCCQ  
Units  
pF  
V/ns  
V
Output load capacitance, CL  
Minimum input rise and fall slew rates[120]  
Input pulse levels  
Input timing measurement reference levels  
Output timing measurement reference levels  
V
V
CCQ/2  
CCQ/2  
V
V
VccQ  
Input VccQ / 2  
Measurement Level  
VccQ / 2 Output  
Vss  
Figure 31  
Input waveforms and measurement levels[121]  
Note  
119.Input and output timing is referenced to VCCQ/2 or to the crossing of CK/CK#.  
120.All AC timings assume an input slew rate of 2 V/ns. CK/CK# differential slew rate of at least 4 V/ns.  
121.Input timings for the differential CK/CK# pair are measured from clock crossings.  
Datasheet  
106  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Timing specifications  
12.2  
AC characteristics  
CLK characteristics  
12.2.1  
tCK  
tCKHP  
tCKHP  
CK#  
VIX (Max)  
VCCQ / 2  
VIX (Min)  
CK  
Figure 32  
Table 57  
Clock characteristics  
Clock timings  
166 MHz  
133 MHz  
100 MHz  
50 MHz[123]  
Parameter  
CK period  
Symbol  
tCK  
Unit  
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max  
7.5 10 20  
6
ns  
CK half period - Duty cycle tCKHP  
CK half period at frequency  
0.45 0.55 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.55 tCK  
Min = 0.45 tCK Min  
Max = 0.55 tCK Min  
tCKHP  
2.7  
3.3 3.375 4.125 4.5  
5.5  
9
11  
ns  
Table 58  
Clock AC/DC electrical characteristics  
Parameter  
Symbol  
VIN  
VID(DC)  
VID(AC)  
VIX  
Min  
–0.3  
VCCQ × 0.4  
VCCQ × 0.6  
VCCQ × 0.4  
Max  
Unit  
DC input voltage  
VCCQ + 0.3  
VCCQ + 0.6  
VCCQ + 0.6  
VCCQ × 0.6  
V
V
V
V
DC input differential voltage  
AC input differential voltage  
AC differential crossing voltage  
Note  
122.Clock jitter of ±5% is permitted.  
123.50 MHz timings are only relevant when a burst write is used to load data during a HYPERFLASH™ Word  
Program command.  
124.CK# is only used on the 1.8 V device and is shown as a dashed waveform.  
125.CK and CK# input slew rate must be >= 1 V/ns (2 V/ns if measured differentially).  
126.VID is the magnitude of the difference between the input level on CK and the input level on CK#.  
127.The value of VIX is expected to equal VCCQ/2 of the transmitting device and must track variations in the DC  
level of VCCQ.  
Datasheet  
107  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Timing specifications  
12.2.2  
Read transaction diagrams  
tCSHI  
tCSM  
CS#  
tCSS  
tCSH  
tCSS  
tACC = Access  
4 cycle latency  
CK, CK#  
RWDS  
tDSV  
tCKDS  
tDSZ  
tDSS  
tOZ  
tIS  
tIH  
tDQLZ  
tCKD  
tDSH  
Dn  
A
Dn  
Dn+1 Dn+1  
DQ[7:0]  
47:40 39:32 31:24 23:16 15:8 7:0  
Command-Address  
B
A
B
RWDS and Data  
are edge aligned  
Memory drives DQ[7:0]  
and RWDS  
Host drives DQ[7:0] and Memory drives RWDS  
Figure 33  
Read timing diagram  
Datasheet  
108  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Timing specifications  
12.2.3  
Read AC parameters  
Table 59  
HYPERBUS™ 1.8 V/3.0 V Device Common Read timing parameters  
166 MHz  
Min Max  
133 MHz  
Min Max  
100 MHz  
Min Max  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Chip Select HIGH between transactions tCSHI  
Chip Select setup to next CK rising edge tCSS  
6.00  
3.00  
0.60  
0.60  
0
1.00  
0
7.50  
3.00  
0.80  
0.80  
0
1.00  
0
10.00  
3.00  
1.00  
1.00  
0
1.00  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Data Strobe valid  
Input setup  
tDSV  
tIS  
12.00  
96.00  
5.50  
4.60  
12.00  
96.00  
5.50  
4.50  
12.00  
96.00  
5.50  
4.30  
Input hold  
tIH  
HYPERFLASH™ Read Initial Access time  
Clock to DQs Low Z  
CK transition to DQ valid  
CK transition to DQ invalid  
tACC  
tDQLZ  
tCKD  
tCKDI  
Data valid (tDV min = the lessor of:  
tCKHP min – tCKD max + tCKDI max) or  
tCKHP min – tCKD min + tCKDI min)  
CK transition to RWDS valid  
RWDS transition to DQ valid  
RWDS transition to DQ invalid  
Chip Select hold after CK falling edge  
Chip Select inactive to RWDS High-Z  
Chip Select inactive to DQ High-Z  
tDV  
1.70  
1.00  
2.37  
1.00  
3.30  
1.00  
ns  
tCKDS  
tDSS  
tDSH  
tCSH  
tDSZ  
tOZ  
5.50  
5.50  
5.50  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
–0.45 +0.45 –0.60 +0.60 –0.80 +0.80  
–0.45 +0.45 –0.60 +0.60 –0.80 +0.80  
0
6.00  
6.00  
0
6.00  
6.00  
0
6.00  
6.00  
Note  
128.A HYPERBUS™ device operates correctly with the tCSH value shown, however, CS# must generally remain  
driven LOW (active) by the HYPERBUS™ master longer, so that data remains valid long enough to account  
for tCKD, tCKDS, and the master interface phase shifting of RWDS to capture the last data transfer from the  
DQ signals. The HYPERBUS™ master will need to drive CS# LOW for one or more additional clock periods to  
ensure capture of valid data from the last desired data transfer.  
Datasheet  
109  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Timing specifications  
CS#  
tCKHP  
tCSH  
tCSS  
CK,CK#  
PSC,PSC#  
tPSCRWDS  
tDSZ  
RWDS  
tCKDI  
tCKD  
tDQLZ  
tDV  
tOZ  
tCKD  
Dn  
A
Dn  
B
Dn+1  
A
Dn+1  
B
DQ[7:0]  
RWDS and Data are driven by the memory  
Figure 34  
Table 60  
DCARS data valid timing[129, 130, 131]  
DCARS Read timings (@ 3.0 V)[132]  
Parameter  
100 MHz  
Symbol  
Unit  
Min  
Max  
6.5  
HYPERFLASH™ PSC transition to RWDS transition  
Time delta between CK to DQ valid and PSC to RWDS  
tPSCRWDS  
PSCRWDS - tCKD  
1
ns  
ns  
t
–1.0  
+0.5  
Table 61  
DCARS Read timings (@ 1.8 V)[132]  
Parameter Symbol  
tPSCRWDS  
133 MHz  
100 MHz  
Unit  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
HYPERFLASH™ PSC transition to RWDS  
transition  
1
5.5  
1
5.5  
ns  
ns  
Time delta between CK to DQ valid and  
PSC to RWDS  
tPSCRWDS - tCKD  
–1.0  
+0.5  
–1.0  
+0.5  
Notes  
129.CK# and PSC# are optional and shown as dashed line waveforms.  
130.The delay (phase shift) from CK to PSC is controlled by the HYPERBUS™ master interface (Host) and is  
generally between 40 and 140 degrees in order to place the RWDS edge within the data valid window with  
sufficient set-up and hold time of data to RWDS. The requirements for data set-up and hold time to RWDS  
are determined by the HYPERBUS™ master interface design and are not addressed by the HYPERBUS™ slave  
timing parameters.  
131.The HYPERBUS™ timing parameters of tCKD and tCKDI define the beginning and end position of the data valid  
period. The tCKD and tCKDI values track together (vary by the same ratio) because RWDS and Data are outputs  
from the same device under the same voltage and temperature conditions.  
132.Sampled, not 100% tested.  
Datasheet  
110  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Timing specifications  
12.2.4  
Word programming with multiple word burst data load  
tCSHI  
CS#  
tCSS  
tCSH  
CK# / CK  
RWDS  
tDSV  
tDSZ  
tIH  
47:40 39:32 31:24 23:16 15:8  
Command-Address  
7:0  
15:8  
7:0  
15:8  
7:0  
15:8  
7:0  
DQ[7:0]  
Write_Data  
Write_Data  
Host drives DQ[7:0] with Command-Address and Write Data  
Figure 35  
Burst Write during load of multiple words during a Word Program command  
timing diagram[133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138]  
Notes  
133.Transactions must be initiated with CK = LOW and CK# = HIGH. CS# must return HIGH before a new  
transaction is initiated.  
134.HYPERFLASH™ memory drives RWDS LOW during write while CS# is LOW.  
135.Burst Write operations are not allowed while in an ASO state.  
136.Burst Write operations are only allowed while loading multiple words during a Word Program command.  
137.Burst write operations are linear only, no wrapped burst write capability is supported.  
138.CK# is only used on the 1.8 V device.  
Datasheet  
111  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Timing specifications  
12.2.5  
Write AC parameters  
Table 62  
HYPERFLASH™ 1.8 V/3.0 V device common write timing parameters  
166 MHz  
Min Max  
133 MHz  
Min Max  
100 MHz  
Min Max  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Chip Select HIGH between transactions tCSHI  
Chip Select setup to next CK rising edge tCSS  
6.00  
3.00  
0.60  
0.60  
0
7.50  
3.00  
0.80  
0.80  
0
10.00  
3.00  
1.00  
1.00  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Data Strobe valid  
Input setup  
tDSV  
tIS  
12.00  
12.00  
12.00  
Input hold  
tIH  
Chip Select hold after CK falling edge  
tCSH  
Chip Select inactive or clock to RWDS  
High-Z  
tDSZ  
6.00  
6.00  
6.00  
ns  
Table 63  
Burst Write during load of multiple words during a Word Program command timings  
50 MHz[140]  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Min  
Max  
50  
Operating frequency for burst write  
Chip Select setup to next CK rising edge  
Chip Select active to RWDS valid (LOW)  
Input setup  
MHz  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tCSS  
tDSV  
tIS  
3
8
1.0  
1.0  
0
10.0  
6
Input hold  
tIH  
Chip Select hold after CK falling edge  
Chip Select inactive to RWDS High-Z  
Chip Select HIGH between operations  
tCSH  
tDSZ  
tCSHI  
Notes  
139.Sampled, not 100% tested.  
140.50 MHz timings are only required when using a burst write during a Word Program command.  
Datasheet  
112  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded algorithm performance  
13  
Embedded algorithm performance  
Table 64  
Embedded algorithm characteristics  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ[141] Max[142] Unit  
Comments  
Sector Erase Time 256-KB  
Parameter Sector Erase Time 4-KB  
Chip Erase Time (128 Mb)  
Chip Erase Time (256 Mb)  
Chip Erase Time (512 Mb)  
930  
240  
55  
2900  
725  
115  
231  
462  
ms  
ms  
s
Includes pre-programming  
prior to erasure[144]  
110  
220  
s
s
Word Programming  
command sequence  
Buffered Programming  
command sequence  
Single Word Programming Time  
270  
270  
1000  
1000  
µs  
µs  
Half-page (16-byte) Buffered  
Programming Time  
Buffer Programming Time (full 512-byte)  
475  
2000  
50  
µs  
µs  
Erase Suspend / Erase Resume (tESL  
Program Suspend / Program Resume  
(tPSL  
)
50  
µs  
)
Minimum of 60 ns but   
typical periods are needed  
for erase to progress to  
completion  
Erase Resume to next Erase Suspend  
(tERS  
100  
µs  
)
Minimum of 60 ns but   
typical periods are needed  
for program to progress to  
completion  
Program Resume to next Program  
Suspend (tPRS  
100  
µs  
)
Blank Check (256-KB Sector)  
15  
17  
256  
ms  
Industrial Temperature  
Industrial Plus  
NOP (Number of Program-operations, per  
Line)  
Temperature  
32  
Only a single program  
operation on each 8-word  
(16-byte) half-page  
Evaluate Erase Status Time (tEES  
Password Comparison Time (tPSWD  
CRC Suspend / CRC Resume (tCRCSL  
)
80  
70  
100  
100  
120  
25  
µs  
µs  
µs  
)
)
Minimum of 60 ns but   
typical periods are needed  
for the CRC calculation to  
progress to completion  
CRC Resume to next CRC Suspend (tCRCRS  
)
5
µs  
Notes  
141.Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, (1.8 V or 3.0 V) VCC, 10,000 cycle,  
and a checkerboard data pattern.  
142.Under worst case conditions of 90°C, VCC = (1.70 V or 2.7 V), 100,000 cycles, and a random data pattern.  
143.Effective write buffer specification is based upon a 512-byte write buffer operation.  
144.In the pre-programming step of the embedded erase algorithm, all words are programmed to 0000h before  
Sector and Chip erasure.  
145.System-level overhead is the time required to execute the bus-cycle sequence for the program command.  
See Table 41 for further information on command definitions.  
Datasheet  
113  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Embedded algorithm performance  
Table 64  
Embedded algorithm characteristics (Continued)  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ[141] Max[142] Unit  
Comments  
CRC Calculation Setup Time (tCRC_SETUP  
CRC Calculation Rate  
Notes  
)
10  
µs  
Calculation rate over a  
60  
65  
MBps large (>1024-byte) block of  
data  
141.Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, (1.8 V or 3.0 V) VCC, 10,000 cycle,  
and a checkerboard data pattern.  
142.Under worst case conditions of 90°C, VCC = (1.70 V or 2.7 V), 100,000 cycles, and a random data pattern.  
143.Effective write buffer specification is based upon a 512-byte write buffer operation.  
144.In the pre-programming step of the embedded erase algorithm, all words are programmed to 0000h before  
Sector and Chip erasure.  
145.System-level overhead is the time required to execute the bus-cycle sequence for the program command.  
See Table 41 for further information on command definitions.  
Datasheet  
114  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Ordering information  
14  
Ordering information  
14.1  
Ordering part numbers  
The ordering part number is formed by a valid combination of the following:  
S26KS 256  
S
DP  
B
H
I
02  
0
Packing type  
0 = Tray  
3 = 13” Tape and reel  
Model number (Additional ordering options)  
02 = FBGA 24-ball, 1.00 mm height (VAA024)  
03 = DCARS FBGA 24-ball, 1.00 mm height (VAA024)  
Temperature range / grade  
I = Industrial (–40°C to +85°C)  
V = Industrial Plus (–40°C to +105°C)  
N = Extended (–40°C to +125°C)  
A = Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 3 (–40°C to +85°C)  
B = Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 2 (–40°C to +105°C)  
M = Automotive, AEC-Q100 grade 1 (–40°C to +125°C)  
Package materials  
H = Halogen-free, Lead (Pb)-free[147]  
Package type  
B = FBGA 6 × 8 mm package, 1.00 mm pitch  
Speed  
DA = 100 MHz  
DP = 166 MHz  
DG = 133 MHz  
Device technology  
S = 65 nm MIRRORBIT™ Process Technology  
Density  
128 = 128 Mb  
256 = 256 Mb  
512 = 512 Mb  
Device family  
S26KS  
1.8 V-only, HYPERFLASH™ Memory  
S26KL  
3.0 V-only, HYPERFLASH™ Memory  
Notes  
146.FBGA package marking omits the leading S2 and the packing type character from the ordering part number.  
147.Halogen free definition is in accordance with IEC 61249-2-21 specification.  
Datasheet  
115  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Ordering information  
14.2  
Valid combinations — standard  
The valid combinations table lists configurations planned to be available in volume. The table will be updated as  
new combinations are released. Contact your local sales representative to confirm availability of specific  
combinations and to check on newly released combinations.  
Table 65  
Device  
Valid combinations — standard  
Package  
Ordering part  
number  
Speed  
Temperature Model Packing  
Package  
marking  
and  
number option  
range  
number type  
material  
(x = Packing type)  
S26KL512SDABHI02x 6KL512SDAHI02  
S26KL512SDABHV02x 6KL512SDAHV02  
S26KL512SDABHN02x 6KL512SDAHN02  
S26KL256SDABHI02x 6KL256SDAHI02  
S26KL256SDABHV02x 6KL256SDAHV02  
S26KL256SDABHN02x 6KL256SDAHN02  
S26KL128SDABHI02x 6KL128SDAHI02  
S26KL128SDABHV02x 6KL128SDAHV02  
S26KL128SDABHN02x 6KL128SDAHN02  
S26KS512SDPBHI02x 6KS512SDPHI02  
S26KS512SDPBHV02x 6KS512SDPHV02  
S26KS512SDPBHN02x 6KS512SDPHN02  
S26KS256SDPBHI02x 6KS256SDPHI02  
S26KS256SDPBHV02x 6KS256SDPHV02  
S26KS256SDPBHN02x 6KS256SDPHN02  
S26KS128SDPBHI02x 6KS128SDPHI02  
S26KS128SDPBHV02x 6KS128SDPHV02  
S26KS128SDPBHN02x 6KS128SDPHN02  
S26KL512S  
S26KL256S  
S26KL128S  
S26KS512S  
S26KS256S  
S26KS128S  
DA  
DA  
DA  
DP  
DP  
DP  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BH  
I, V, N  
02  
02  
02  
02  
02  
02  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
I, V, N  
I, V, N  
I, V, N  
I, V, N  
I, V, N  
Note  
148.FBGA package marking omits the leading S2 and the packing type character from the ordering part number.  
Datasheet  
116  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Ordering information  
Table 66  
Device  
Valid combinations — DCARS standard  
Package  
Ordering part  
number  
Speed  
Temperature Model Packing  
Package  
marking  
and  
number option  
range  
number type  
material  
(x = Packing type)  
S26KL512SDABHI03x 6KL512SDAHI03  
S26KL512SDABHV03x 6KL512SDAHV03  
S26KL512SDABHN03x 6KL512SDAHN03  
S26KL256SDABHI03x 6KL256SDAHI03  
S26KL256SDABHV03x 6KL256SDAHV03  
S26KL256SDABHN03x 6KL256SDAHN03  
S26KL128SDABHI03x 6KL128SDAHI03  
S26KL128SDABHV03x 6KL128SDAHV03  
S26KL128SDABHN03x 6KL128SDAHN03  
S26KS512SDABHI03x 6KS512SDAHI03  
S26KS512SDABHV03x 6KS512SDAHV03  
S26KS512SDABHN03x 6KS512SDAHN03  
S26KS512SDGBHI03x 6KS512SDGHI03  
S26KS512SDGBHV03x 6KS512SDGHV03  
S26KS512SDGBHN03x 6KS512SDGHN03  
S26KS256SDABHI03x 6KS256SDAHI03  
S26KS256SDABHV03x 6KS256SDAHV03  
S26KS256SDABHN03x 6KS256SDAHN03  
S26KS256SDGBHI03x 6KS256SDGHI03  
S26KS256SDGBHV03x 6KS256SDGHV03  
S26KS256SDGBHN03x 6KS256SDGHN03  
S26KS128SDABHI03x 6KS128SDAHI03  
S26KS128SDABHV03x 6KS128SDAHV03  
S26KS128SDABHN03x 6KS128SDAHN03  
S26KS128SDGBHI03x 6KS128SDGHI03  
S26KS128SDGBHV03x 6KS128SDGHV03  
S26KS128SDGBHN03x 6KS128SDGHN03  
S26KL512S  
S26KL256S  
S26KL128S  
DA  
DA  
DA  
BH  
BH  
BH  
I, V, N  
03  
03  
03  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
I, V, N  
I, V, N  
S26KS512S DA, DG  
S26KS256S DA, DG  
S26KS128S DA, DG  
BH  
BH  
BH  
I, V, N  
I, V, N  
I, V, N  
03  
03  
03  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
Note  
149.FBGA package marking omits the leading S2 and the packing type character from the ordering part number.  
Datasheet  
117  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Ordering information  
14.3  
Valid combinations — automotive grade / AEC-Q100  
The table below lists configurations that are automotive grade / AEC-Q100 qualified and are planned to be  
available in volume. The table will be updated as new combinations are released. Contact your local sales  
representative to confirm availability of specific combinations and to check on newly released combinations.  
Production part approval process (PPAP) support is only provided for AEC-Q100 grade products.  
Products to be used in end-use applications that require ISO/TS-16949 compliance must be AEC-Q100 grade  
products in combination with PPAP. Non–AEC-Q100 grade products are not manufactured or documented in full  
compliance with ISO/TS-16949 requirements.  
AEC-Q100 grade products are also offered without PPAP support for end-use applications that do not require  
ISO/TS-16949 compliance.  
Table 67  
Device  
Valid combinations — automotive grade / AEC-Q100  
Package  
Ordering part  
number  
Speed  
Temperature Model Packing  
Package  
marking  
and  
number option  
range  
number type  
material  
(x = Packing type)  
S26KL512SDABHA02x 6KL512SDAHA02  
S26KL512SDABHB02x 6KL512SDAHB02  
S26KL512SDABHM02x 6KL512SDAHM02  
S26KL256SDABHA02x 6KL256SDAHA02  
S26KL256SDABHB02x 6KL256SDAHB02  
S26KL256SDABHM02x 6KL256SDAHM02  
S26KL128SDABHA02x 6KL128SDAHA02  
S26KL128SDABHB02x 6KL128SDAHB02  
S26KL128SDABHM02x 6KL128SDAHM02  
S26KS512SDPBHA02x 6KS512SDPHA02  
S26KS512SDPBHB02x 6KS512SDPHB02  
S26KS512SDPBHM02x 6KS512SDPHM02  
S26KS256SDPBHA02x 6KS256SDPHA02  
S26KS256SDPBHB02x 6KS256SDPHB02  
S26KS256SDPBHM02x 6KS256SDPHM02  
S26KS128SDPBHA02x 6KS128SDPHA02  
S26KS128SDPBHB02x 6KS128SDPHB02  
S26KS128SDPBHM02x 6KS128SDPHM02  
S26KL512S  
S26KL256S  
S26KL128S  
S26KS512S  
S26KS256S  
S26KS128S  
DA  
DA  
DA  
DP  
DP  
DP  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BH  
A, B, M  
02  
02  
02  
02  
02  
02  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
A, B, M  
A, B, M  
A, B, M  
A, B, M  
A, B, M  
Datasheet  
118  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Ordering information  
Table 68  
Device  
Valid combinations — DCARS automotive grade / AEC-Q100  
Package  
and  
Ordering part  
Speed  
Temperature Model Packing  
Package  
marking  
number  
number option  
range  
number type  
material  
(x = Packing Type)  
S26KL512SDABHA03x 6KL512SDAHA03  
S26KL512SDABHB03x 6KL512SDAHB03  
S26KL512SDABHM03x 6KL512SDAHM03  
S26KL256SDABHA03x 6KL256SDAHA03  
S26KL256SDABHB03x 6KL256SDAHB03  
S26KL256SDABHM03x 6KL256SDAHM03  
S26KL128SDABHA03x 6KL128SDAHA03  
S26KL128SDABHB03x 6KL128SDAHB03  
S26KL128SDABHM03x 6KL128SDAHM03  
S26KS512SDABHA03x 6KS512SDAHA03  
S26KS512SDABHB03x 6KS512SDAHB03  
S26KS512SDABHM03x 6KS512SDAHM03  
S26KS512SDGBHA03x 6KS512SDGHA03  
S26KS512SDGBHB03x 6KS512SDGHB03  
S26KS512SDGBHM03x 6KS512SDGHM03  
S26KS256SDABHA03x 6KS256SDAHA03  
S26KS256SDABHB03x 6KS256SDAHB03  
S26KS256SDABHM03x 6KS256SDAHM03  
S26KS256SDGBHA03x 6KS256SDGHA03  
S26KS256SDGBHB03x 6KS256SDGHB03  
S26KS256SDGBHM03x 6KS256SDGHM03  
S26KS128SDABHA03x 6KS128SDAHA03  
S26KS128SDABHB03x 6KS128SDAHB03  
S26KS128SDABHM03x 6KS128SDAHM03  
S26KS128SDGBHA03x 6KS128SDGHA03  
S26KS128SDGBHB03x 6KS128SDGHB03  
S26KS128SDGBHM03x 6KS128SDGHM03  
S26KL512S  
S26KL256S  
S26KL128S  
DA  
DA  
DA  
BH  
BH  
BH  
A, B, M  
03  
03  
03  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
A, B, M  
A, B, M  
S26KS512S DA, DG  
S26KS256S DA, DG  
S26KS128S DA, DG  
BH  
BH  
BH  
A, B, M  
A, B, M  
A, B, M  
03  
03  
03  
0, 3  
0, 3  
0, 3  
Datasheet  
119  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Package diagram  
15  
Package diagram  
15.1  
Fortified ball grid array 24-ball 6 ×8 ×1.0 mm (VAA024)  
NOTES:  
DIMENSIONS  
SYMBOL  
MIN.  
-
NOM.  
MAX.  
1.00  
-
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
A
-
-
A1  
D
0.20  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JEP95, SECTION 3, SPP-020.  
8.00 BSC  
4.  
5.  
"e" REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
E
6.00 BSC  
4.00 BSC  
4.00 BSC  
5
SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D" DIRECTION.  
D1  
E1  
MD  
ME  
N
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "E" DIRECTION.  
N IS THE NUMBER OF POPULATED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
5
24  
"SD" AND "SE" ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A AND B AND DEFINE THE  
POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
0.40  
b
0.35  
0.45  
eE  
eD  
SD  
SE  
1.00 BSC  
1.00 BSC  
0.00 BSC  
0.00 BSC  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW "SD" OR "SE" = 0.  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" = eD/2 AND "SE" = eE/2.  
8.  
9.  
"+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED BALLS.  
A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION  
OR OTHER MEANS.  
JEDEC SPECIFICATION NO. REF: N/A  
10.  
002-15550 *A  
Figure 36  
24-ball BGA (8.0 × 6.0 × 1.0 mm) package outline, 002-15550  
Datasheet  
120  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Revision history  
Revision history  
Document  
Date  
Description of changes  
revision  
**  
2015-04-23  
Initial release.  
Global: Changed ‘continuous’ to ‘linear’  
Distinctive Characteristics: Removed ‘Feature Variations by Density’ table  
Signal Descriptions: HyperFlash Interface figure: updated  
HyperBus Protocol: Updated section  
Embedded Operations: Deep Power-Down: updated section  
Data Integrity: Program / Erase Endurance table: added Extended  
temperature, updated Minimum and Typical values  
Data Retention table: Updated Parameter; added Note  
Hardware Interface: Updated section  
*A  
2015-06-12  
Electrical Specifications: Updated section  
Timing Specifications: Updated section  
Physical Interface: Updated section  
Physical Diagrams: FBGA 25-Ball, 6 x 8 x 1 mm, 5x5 Array Package Outline  
Drawing: updated figure  
Ordering Part Numbers: Updated  
Valid Combinations: Added ‘Package Marking’  
Distinctive Characteristics: Updated Endurance and Retention  
Embedded Algorithm Performance: Embedded Algorithm Characteristics  
table: removed Note 6  
Data Integrity: Program / Erase Endurance table: updated Minimum values,  
removed Typical values  
*B  
2015-07-16  
Data Retention table: updated Parameter, removed Note  
Physical Interface: Updated section; Removed connection diagram and  
physical diagrams  
Ordering Information: Updated section  
Valid Combinations: Updated table  
*C  
*D  
2015-07-24  
2015-09-29  
Updated to Cypress template.  
Changed status from Advance to Final.  
Template updates: Removed cover page and Spansion Revision History.  
Updated Electrical specifications.  
Updated DC characteristics (CMOS compatible):  
Changed maximum value of IDPD parameter corresponding to “512 Mb @  
25 °C” from 15 µA to 18 µA.  
*E  
2015-12-14  
Added values of IDPD parameter corresponding to “512 Mb @ 125 °C,  
“256 Mb @ 125 °C” and “128 Mb @ 125 °C.  
Updated Ordering information:  
Updated Valid Combinations:  
Added Extended Temperature part numbers.  
Datasheet  
121  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Revision history  
Document  
Date  
Description of changes  
revision  
Removed Confidential NDA status from datasheet.  
Updated Features.  
Added Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade to Features.  
Updated Performance summary.  
Updated Figure 1.  
Removed Wear Leveling section.  
Updated CRC check-value calculation.  
Updated Figure 5.  
Updated Figure 6.  
Added formula in Read operations.  
Updated Table 3.  
Updated Table 4.  
Updated tables in Flash memory array.  
Updated tables in Volatile and Non-volatile Register summary.  
Updated Features.  
Added Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade to Features.  
Updated Performance summary.  
Updated Figure 1.  
Removed Wear Leveling section.  
Updated CRC check-value calculation.  
Updated Figure 5.  
*F  
2016-10-25  
Updated Figure 6.  
Added formula in Read operations.  
Updated Table 3.  
Updated Table 4.  
Updated tables in Flash memory array.  
Updated tables in Volatile and Non-volatile Register summary.  
Updated Table 48.  
Updated Capacitance characteristics.  
Updated tables in Capacitance characteristics.  
Updated Read transaction diagrams.  
Updated tables Read AC parameters.  
Updated Write AC parameters.  
Removed JEDEC SPI Reset Method section.  
Updated Embedded algorithm performance.  
Updated Ordering information:  
Updated Valid combinations — standard.  
Added Valid combinations — automotive grade / AEC-Q100.  
Updated Package diagram:  
Added Fortified ball grid array 24-ball 6 × 8 × 1.0 mm (VAA024).  
Updated to new template.  
Datasheet  
122  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Revision history  
Document  
Date  
Description of changes  
revision  
Updated Embedded operations:  
Updated Program and erase summary:  
Updated Non-volatile Configuration Register and Volatile Configuration  
Register:  
Updated Table 18 (Updated details corresponding to xVCR.2 bit).  
Updated Error types and clearing procedures:  
Updated ECC error:  
Updated Table 25 (Updated description below).  
Updated description and Table 26 in Address Trap Register (ATR).  
Updated description in Error Detection Counter.  
Updated Data protection:  
Updated ASP Configuration Register:  
Updated Table 29 (Updated details corresponding to Bit 13 and Bit 9).  
Updated Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map:  
Updated Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO map —  
standard:  
Updated Table 35 (Updated details corresponding to Word Address “(SA) +  
000Eh”).  
Updated Table 37 (Updated details corresponding to Word Address “(SA) +  
001Bh, (SA) + 001Ch” and “(SA) + 0022h”).  
Updated Table 38 (Updated details corresponding to Word Address “(SA) +  
0027h”).  
Updated Electrical specifications:  
Updated Operating ranges:  
Updated Power supply voltages:  
Replaced “1.7V to 2.0V” with “1.7V to 1.95V.  
Updated Power-up and power-down:  
*G  
2016-12-29  
Updated Table 51 (Updated maximum value of VCC parameter).  
Updated Timing specifications:  
Updated AC characteristics:  
Updated Read transaction diagrams:  
Updated Figure 33 (Updated caption only (Removed “No Additional  
Latency Required”).  
Removed figure “Read Timing Diagram – With Additional Latency.  
Updated Read AC parameters:  
Updated Read AC parameters:  
Removed tRWR, tCSM parameters and their details.  
Removed details corresponding to “HyperRAM Read Initial Access Time” of  
tACC parameter.  
Updated Table 59:  
Removed details corresponding to “HyperRAM PSC transition to RWDS  
transition” of tPSCRWDS parameter.  
Updated Table 61:  
Removed details corresponding to “HyperRAM PSC transition to RWDS  
transition” of tPSCRWDS parameter.  
Removed “Write Transaction Diagrams.  
Added Word programming with multiple word burst data load.  
Updated Write AC parameters:  
Updated Table 62:  
Removed tRWR, tDMV, tACC, tCSM parameters and their details.  
Updated Embedded algorithm performance:  
Updated Table 64:  
Added tCRCSL, tCRCRS, tCRC_SETUP, CRC Calculation Rate parameters and their  
details.  
Datasheet  
123  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family  
HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V  
Revision history  
Document  
Date  
Description of changes  
revision  
Updated Embedded operations:  
Updated Data protection:  
Updated ASP Configuration Register:  
Updated Table 29.  
*H  
2017-02-06  
Updated Software interface reference:  
Removed xVCR0/1 references.  
Updated to new template.  
Updated Connection diagram:  
Updated FBGA 24-ball 5 × 5 array footprint:  
Updated Figure 5 (Changed pin A3 from RFU to DNU).  
Added Thermal Impedance.  
*I  
2017-08-10  
2017-08-28  
Updated to new template.  
Updated Ordering information.  
Updated Table 54.  
*J  
Added Active Clock Stop Waveforms.  
Word Program timing is made identical to 16-Byte Program timing.  
Updated Electrical specifications:  
*K  
*L  
2018-06-01  
2018-08-14  
Updated Power Conservation modes:  
Removed “Active Clock Stop.  
Updated to new template.  
Updated note references in Table 56.  
Updated Ordering part numbers:  
Updated details corresponding to “H” under “Package Materials.  
Referred Note 148 in “H.  
Updated Embedded operations:  
Updated Program and erase summary:  
Updated Program methods:  
Updated Write buffer programming:  
Updated description.  
Updated Evaluate Erase Status:  
Updated description.  
*M  
2019-06-12  
Updated Electrical specifications:  
Updated Thermal Impedance:  
Updated Table 45.  
Updated to new template.  
Updated Document Title to read as “S26KL512S, S26KS512S, S26KL256S,  
S26KS256S, S26KL128S, S26KS128S, 512 Mb (64 MB)/256 Mb (32 MB)/  
128 Mb (16 MB) HYPERFLASH™ Family HYPERBUS™, 3.0 V/1.8 V.  
Updated Electrical specifications:  
Updated Thermal resistance:  
Replaced “Thermal Impedance” with “Thermal resistance” in heading.  
Updated Table 45.  
*N  
*O  
2022-07-27  
2022-10-26  
Updated Package diagram:  
Replaced “Physical interface” with “Package diagram” in heading.  
Migrated to Infineon template.  
Completing Sunset Review.  
Updated Electrical specifications:  
Updated Thermal resistance:  
Updated Table 45.  
Datasheet  
124  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
2022-10-26  
Please read the Important Notice and Warnings at the end of this document  
Trademarks  
All referenced product or service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
For further information on the product, technology,  
The information given in this document shall in no  
event be regarded as a guarantee of conditions or  
characteristics (“Beschaffenheitsgarantie”).  
Edition 2022-10-26  
Published by  
delivery terms and conditions and prices please  
contact your nearest Infineon Technologies office  
(www.infineon.com).  
Infineon Technologies AG  
81726 Munich, Germany  
With respect to any examples, hints or any typical  
values stated herein and/or any information  
regarding the application of the product, Infineon  
Technologies hereby disclaims any and all  
warranties and liabilities of any kind, including  
without limitation warranties of non-infringement of  
intellectual property rights of any third party.  
WARNINGS  
Due to technical requirements products may contain  
dangerous substances. For information on the types  
in question please contact your nearest Infineon  
Technologies office.  
© 2022 Infineon Technologies AG.  
All Rights Reserved.  
Except as otherwise explicitly approved by Infineon  
In addition, any information given in this document  
is subject to customer’s compliance with its  
obligations stated in this document and any  
applicable legal requirements, norms and standards  
concerning customer’s products and any use of the  
product of Infineon Technologies in customer’s  
applications.  
Technologies in  
authorized  
a written document signed by  
Do you have a question about this  
document?  
Go to www.infineon.com/support  
representatives  
of  
Infineon  
Technologies, Infineon Technologies’ products may  
not be used in any applications where a failure of the  
product or any consequences of the use thereof can  
reasonably be expected to result in personal injury.  
Document reference  
001-99198 Rev. *O  
The data contained in this document is exclusively  
intended for technically trained staff. It is the  
responsibility of customer’s technical departments  
to evaluate the suitability of the product for the  
intended application and the completeness of the  
product information given in this document with  
respect to such application.  

相关型号:

SI9130DB

5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous Converters

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1-E3

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135_11

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9136_11

Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130CG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130LG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130_11

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137DB

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137LG

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9122E

500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification Drivers

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY